Swifts Cable Tray

Swifts®
cable tray
the established leader
PRODUCT TECHNICAL GUIDE /

INCLUDING SWIFTRACK
AND SUPPORTING SYSTEMS
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Swifts cable tray features 2-5 SWIFTS CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS
Legrand worldwide 6 Light duty (SS)
Sustainable development 6 Straight lengths and coupling detail 36-37
UK manufacturing, design and accreditation 7 Fittings 38-45
Case studies 8 Medium duty (MRF)
Intergraph, AVEVA and Bentley 9 Straight lengths, couplers and
universal bracket and fishplate 46-49
PRODUCT SELECTION Fittings 50-61
Heavy duty (SRF)
SWIFTS CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS Straight lengths, couplers and
Selection charts 12-15 universal bracket and fishplate 62-65
Straight lengths, couplers and fittings Fittings 66-79
Light duty (SS) 16-17 Extra heavy duty (XRF)
Medium duty (MRF) 18-19 Straight lengths and couplers 80-81
Heavy duty (SRF) 20-21 Fittings 82-89
Extra heavy duty (XRF) 22-23 Supports 90-94
Supports 24 Ancillary items 95-101
Ancillary items 25 Covers 97-100
Covers 25
Fasteners 26 SWIFTRACK CHANNEL SUPPORT SYSTEM
Single channels – plain and slotted 102
SWIFTRACK CHANNEL SUPPORT SYSTEM Back-to-back channels 103
Channel and channel nuts 27 Assembly – fasteners and channel nuts 103
Cantilever arms 28
Cantilever arms 104-105
Framework brackets,
Framework brackets 106-109
clamps and accessories 29-30
Beam clamps, pipe clamps and
Standard fixings and fasteners 31-32
accessories 109-110
CEILING SUPPORT SYSTEM
Heavy duty 33
Heavy duty 111
DESIGN NOTES
Selecting the right finish 114-119
Finishes 120-123
Installation of services 124-131
Structural support characteristics 132-139
Packaging, handling, storage and safety 140-141
Relevant British Standards 142-143
1
Swifts cable tray... ®
the quick fit choice

The distinctive slot pattern on Swifts cable tray systems provides installers with total
flexibility for the positioning of nuts and bolts, cable ties and all ancillary items.
Available in four types, from light duty through to extra heavy duty, each system is
supported by a fully integrated range of time saving fixings and fittings.
NEW universal
bracket...
ultimate versatility
ty
Overcome obstacles and challenges es
on-site with the NEW universal
bracket. One innovative bracket...
endless possibilities
See p. 4 to find out more...
2
Quick fit... money saving! Time-saving
Swifts cable tray, as with all of Legrand’s cable management systems, features innovations
a number of time-saving innovations that not only save time on-site but also reduce man
save money: hours and energy usage
• Integral coupler system on all fittings on site, including fewer
• ‘Easi-clip’ fast-fit connection for MRF tray to Swiftrack channel support components for improved
• Unique adjustable bends assembly times
• Quick-fit couplers available for straight lengths on MRF and SRF tray systems
PRODUCT RANGES
SS - LIGHT DUTY MRF - MEDIUM DUTY SRF - HEAVY DUTY XRF - EXTRA HEAVY DUTY
Tray depth: 12 mm Tray depth: 25 mm Tray depth: 50 mm Tray depth: 80 mm
(for 50 - 225 mm widths) Finishes: Finishes: Finishes:
18 mm G (hot dip galvanised) G (hot dip galvanised) G (hot dip galvanised)
(for 300 mm width and above) D (deep galvanised) D (deep galvanised) D (deep galvanised)
Finishes: PG (pre-galvanised) PG (pre-galvanised) S (stainless steel)
G (hot dip galvanised) S (stainless steel) S (stainless steel)
PG (pre-galvanised) E (powder coated) E (powder coated)
S (stainless steel)
3
Swifts cable tray... ®
ultimate versatility
Overcome obstacles and challenges on-site with the NEW universal bracket. Designed for
use with SRF or MRF cable tray, the universal bracket is a must-have for any toolkit. This
simple, innovative addition to the range offers true versatility when faced with demanding
site conditions.
A simple,
versatile
solution to
on-site
fabrication
4
One innovative bracket... endless confi
figurations
gurations
The NEW universal bracket can be hand folded, bent, split or hinged
inged
to offer a multitude of functions. The unique design provides
the flexibility to cope with demanding on-site requirements.
Supplied with ‘quick bolt fasteners’ and driver tool.
Use in conjunction with the NEW universal fishplate to add additional
ditional
support and cable protection.
Flange assembly Internal riser Flat bend
Snap and fold bracket Snap and hinge Fold or bend bracket
to create a flange bracket to create to desired angle. For
internal or external risers from wider installations add a fishplate
-90 to +90 degrees for additional support
Side dropout Offset fourway Handed reducer
Create specialist Fold or bend 2 pairs Create left, right or

functions such as of brackets to form straight reducers by
side dropouts by folding and specialist offset fourways simply bending the bracket to suit
hinging brackets the application
5
Legrand - global strength
built on local knowledge
With a 15% share of the global market, the Legrand Group is
the world specialist in cable management systems… and with
our established Swifts, Salamandre and Arena-Walsall ranges,
our cable management division has a firm leadership position
in the UK.
Sustainable development
From design through to manufacturing, the Legrand Group
selects materials and processes that respect people and
the environment.
• Efficient and environmentally aware product design
• Product functions that help to avoid energy waste
• Management of manufacturing and logistics sites
• Integration of environmental concerns and ISO 14001
procedures at the Group’s global sites. *
* 84% of sites are ISO 14001:2004 accredited including all UK sites.
Legrand in the UK -
powered by specialists
In the UK Legrand has developed a customer focused
structure which harnesses the power of its market
leading specialist brands to deliver innovative,
integrated solutions for every phase of construction.
6
Quality assured UK manufacturing
Swifts cable management ranges have been designed and manufactured at our
Scarborough (UK) site since the 1960’s. And with its own in-house galvanising
facility, every product is finished to the highest possible standard following
strict quality control guidelines.
Legrand Electric holds ISO 9001 : 2008 Quality Assessment Registrations from
Intertek Systems Certification UK and Bureau Veritas
All of Legrand’s UK manufacturing sites are accredited to ISO 14001 : 2004

Environmental Management System
Support from design to installation

With in-depth knowledge and experience, our expert cable management team
provides customers with support and advice for any installation… including
bespoke solutions (specials) from our in-house design team that can cope with
the most demanding requirements for the most challenging projects.
Registered
Reg no. 10042065
7
Legrand - the cable
management experts
Trusted for installations large and small
Swifts cable tray has been tried and tested in installations of all sizes
throughout the UK and beyond, from light duty requirements in small
commercial buildings through to extra heavy duty installations in refineries
and heavy industry applications.
Cable management project examples

Process, power and marine Transport and infrastructure General
Tengiz Second Generation - Dublin Airport - Ireland MOD, Corsham - Wiltshire
Kazakhstan
Dubai Airport - Dubai Grand Mosque - Dubai
Vesta Wind Turbine Manufacturing
Kings Cross regeneration - London Hong Kong Jockey Club - Hong Kong
Plant - Isle of Wight
Channel Tunnel Rail Link - UK/France Landmark Tower - Dubai
Norilisk Nickel Slag Cleaning
Furnaces Upgrade - Siberia Millau Viaduct - France St. Davids II - Cardiff, Wales
Ling Au Nuclear Plant - China Tyne Tunnel - UK Diwan Al Amiri Utility Building - Qatar
Shell EA and KC upgrades - Nigeria Heathrow T2/T3/T4/T5 - UK Arcapita Bank - Bahrain
Dukhan Facilities Upgrade - Qatar National Convention Centre Tianjin Electronics Plant - China
Car Park - Qatar
Clare Offshore Platform - Shetlands
Eggborough Power Station - UK
8
Specification data for Intergraph, AVEVA and Bentley engineering
software systems
As part of our ongoing commitment to customer support, Legrand’s Swifts cable ladder and cable tray
ranges are now integrated into the following plant design modelling systems :
• Intergraph’s PDS and Smartplant 3D
• AVEVA’s PDMS
• Bentley Systems’ BBES and BRCM
For many industries, achieving higher production goals within budget constraints and strict regulatory
requirements is a challenging prospect. Applying engineering software allows for a high quality, fast-build,
maintainable system which offers full workflow managed integration across the entire project enterprise.
Using a library of intelligent Swifts cable ladder and cable tray product models inside a highly productive 3D
design software system allows design teams to produce accurate and efficient cable management routing
schemes, plans and procurement lists as a fully integrated
part of the overall plant design.
Key benefits include :
• Whole plant lifecycle from FEED (Front End
Engineering Design), detailed design and construction
through to handover, full operation and beyond
• Database driven applications manage all of the
engineering information in one location
• Intelligent rules and relationships including clash
detection features
• High project visibility and review functionality
creating more efficient and productive operations
• High performance 3D visuals giving interactive
walkthrough and realism features
• Making the best use of global design teams
leading to concurrent engineering
9
PRODUCT
SELECTION
IN THIS SECTION
SWIFTS CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS
Selection charts 12-15
SS light duty cable tray
Straight lengths 16
Flat bends 16
Inside, outside and adjustable risers 16-17
Equal tees 17
4 way crosspieces 17
Straight reducers 17
MRF medium duty return flange cable tray
Straight lengths 18
Couplers sets 18
Universal bracket 18
Universal fishplate 18
Flat and adjustable bends 19
Inside and outside risers 19
Adjustable and extra long adjustable risers 19
Equal and unequal tees 19
SRF heavy duty return flange cable tray
Straight lengths 20
Couplers sets 20
Flat and adjustable bends 21
Adjustable and extra long adjustable risers 21
SRF to MRF straight reducers 21
XRF extra heavy duty return flange cable tray
Straight lengths 22
Couplers sets 22
Flat bends 22
Supports 24
Ancillary items and covers 25
Fasteners 26
SWIFTRACK CHANNEL SUPPORT SYSTEM
Channels and channel nuts 27
Cantilever arms 28
Framework brackets, clamps and accessories 29-30
Standard fixings and fasteners 31-32
Heavy duty 33
11
Swifts® SS light duty and MRF medium duty
cable tray systems
SS LIGHT DUTY
TRAY COUPLERS FITTINGS
Widths Straight Coupler sets Universal 90° Flat Adjustable 90° Inside 90° Outside Adjustable
(mm) lengths F = finish bracket bends(1) bends risers risers risers
(3 m) F = finish F = finish F = finish F = finish F = finish F = finish
F = finish
No separate No universal No adjustable

couplers are brackets are bends are
needed, available on available on
see p. 16 SS light duty SS light duty
50 SSL 50 F – – SSB 50 F – SSIR 50 F SSOR 50 F SSAR 50 F

SS LIGHT DUTY
MRF MEDIUM DUTY

Widths Straight Coupler sets Universal 90° Flat Adjustable 90° inside 90° outside Adjustable
(mm) lengths (3 m) F = finish bracket bends(1) bends risers(1) risers(1) risers
F = finish F = finish F = finish F = finish F = finish F = finish F = finish
50 MRFL 50 F MRFC50 F MRFUB F MRFB 50 F MRFAB 50 F MRFIR 50 F MRFOR 50 F MRFAR 50 F
75 MRFL 75 F MRFC F MRFUB F MRFB 75 F MRFAB 75 F MRFIR 75 F MRFOR 75 F MRFAR 75 F

MRF MEDIUM DUTY
450 MRFL 450 F MRFC F MRFUB F MRFB 450 F – MRFIR 450 F MRFOR 450 F MRFAR 450 F
(1) 60°, 45° and 30° angles need to have angle included in order code, ie. MRFB 300 60 G
12
FITTINGS Key : selecting SS light duty fittings
Equal tees Unequal tees 4 way Straight Replace the letters shown in red with your choice from the following options :
F = finish B = branch crosspieces reducers A = Angle (°) : 60, 45 and 30 (90 standard and does not need to be included in
F = finish F = finish K = reduced
width order code)
F = finish F = Finish : G (hot dip galvanised after manufacture),
PG (pre-galvanised steel), S (stainless steel)
No unequal tees K = Narrowed width when using a reducer (mm) :
are available on
SS light duty K 50, 75, 100, 150, 225
W
SST 50 F – SSX 50 F – For 50–225 mm widths – 12 mm depth
For 300 mm – 18 mm depth
SST 75 F – SSX 75 F SSR 75 K F
SST 100 F – SSX 100 F SSR 100 K F
SST 150 F – SSX 150 F SSR 150 K F
SST 225 F – SSX 225 F SSR 225 K F
SST 300 F – SSX 300 F SSR 300 K F Inside riser. See p. 16 Flat bend. See p. 16
FITTINGS Key : selecting MRF medium duty fittings

Equal tees Unequal tees 4 way Straight Replace the letters shown in red with your choice from the following options :
F = finish F = finish K = reduced
width order code)
F = finish B = Branch width (mm) : 50, 75, 100, 150, 225, 300, 450, 600, 750
F = Finish : G (hot dip galvanised after manufacture),
D (deep galvanised steel), PG (pre-galvanised steel),
B
K S (stainless steel), E (powder coated)
K = Narrowed width when using a reducer (mm) :
MRFT 50 F MRFUT 50 B F MRFX 50 F – 50, 75, 100, 150, 225, 300, 450, 600, 750
MRFT 75 F MRFUT 75 B F MRFX 75 F MRFR 75 K F W

25 mm
MRFT 100 F MRFUT 100 B F MRFX 100 F MRFR 100 K F
MRFT225 F MRFUT 225 B F MRFX 225 F MRFR 225 K F

Inside riser. See p. 19 Flat bend. See p. 19
13
Swifts® SRF heavy duty and XRF extra heavy duty
cable tray systems
SRF HEAVY DUTY

Widths Straight Coupler sets Universal 90º Flat Adjustable 90º Inside 90º Outside Adjustable
(mm) lengths (3 m) F = finish bracket bends(1) bends risers(1) risers(1) risers(2)
75 SRFL 75 F SRFC F SRFUB F SRFB 75 F SRFAB 75 F SRFIR 75 F SRFOR 75 F SRFAR 75 F
SRF HEAVY DUTY
450 SRFL 450 F SRFC F SRFUB F SRFB 450 F – SRFIR 450 F SRFOR 450 F SRFAR 450 F
(1) 60°, 45° and 30° angles need to have angle included in order code, ie. SRFB 300 60 G
(2) Extra long adjustable risers also available. Code as adjustable riser and insert X. Example : SRFAXR W F (p. 21)
XRF EXTRA HEAVY DUTY

Widths Straight Coupler sets Universal 90º Flat Adjustable 90º Inside 90º Outside Adjustable
(mm) lengths (3 m) F = finish bracket bends(1) bends risers(1) risers(1) risers
No universal No adjustable No adjustable

brackets are bends are risers are
XRF EXTRA HEAVY DUTY
available on XRF available on XRF available on XRF

extra heavy duty extra heavy duty extra heavy duty
100 XRFL 100 F XRFC F – XRFB 100 F – XRFIR 100 F XRFOR 100 F –
(1) 60°, 45° and 30° angles need to have angle included in order code, ie. XRFB 300 60 G
14
FITTINGS Key : selecting SRF heavy duty fittings
Replace the letters shown in red with your choice from the following options :
Equal tees Unequal tees 4 way Straight
F = finish F = finish K = reduced order code)
width B = Branch width (mm) : 75, 100, 150, 225, 300, 450, 600, 750, 900
F = finish
F = Finish : G (hot dip galvanised after manufacture), D (deep galvanised
steel), PG (pre-galvanised steel), S (stainless steel),
K
E (powder coated)
B
75, 100, 150, 225, 300, 450, 600, 750
SRFT 75 F SRFUT 75 B F SRFX 75 F –
SRFT 100 F SRFUT 100 B F SRFX 100 F SRFR 100 K F W

50 mm depth
SRFT 150 F SRFUT 150 B F SRFX 150 F SRFR 150 K F
SRFT 300 F SRFUT 300 B F SRFX 300 F SRFR 300K F

Inside riser. See p. 21 Flat bend. See p. 21
FITTINGS Key : selecting XRF extra heavy duty fittings

Replace the letters shown in red with your choice from the following options :
Equal tees Unequal tees 4 way Straight A = Angle (°) : 60, 45 and 30 (90 standard and does not need to be included in
F = finish B = branch crosspieces reducers
F = finish F = finish K = reduced order code)
width B = Branch width (mm) : 100, 150, 225, 300, 450
F = finish
D (deep galvanised steel),S (stainless steel)
K = Narrowed width when using a reducer (mm) : 100, 150, 225, 300, 450
K
B
W
80 mm depth
XRFT 100 F XRFUT 100 B F XRFX 100 F –
XRFT 150 F XRFUT 150 B F XRFX 150 F XRFR 150 K F
XRFT 600 F XRFUT 600 B F XRFX 600 F XRFR 600 K F Inside riser. See p. 23 Flat bend. See p. 22
15
Swifts® SS light duty cable tray 12
lengths and fittings or
18
Straight length
SSL 300 PG
Straight length
SSL 300 PG
90° inside riser

SSIR 300 PG 90° bend
SSB 300 PG
Selection chart (p. 12-13)

Dimensions and technical information : lengths (p. 36) ; fittings (p. 38-45)
Design notes (p. 114)
Loading graphs (p. 36)
Pack Cat. Nos. Straight lengths – 3 m Pack Cat. Nos. Fittings (continued)
All SS straight lengths and fittings have Risers
integral couplers, no separate couplers are
needed Inside and outside risers are not available
For SS tray cut to length use fishplates in PG finish
across length-to-length joint, see p. 25
Width Depth 1 SSIR W F 90° inside riser
(mm) (mm) For technical information,
1 SSL 50 F 50 12 see p. 40-41
1 SSL 75 F 75 12
1 SSL 100 F 100 12
1 SSL 150 F 150 12
1 SSL 225 F 225 12
1 SSL 300 F 300 18
For technical information, see p. 36-37 1 SSIR W A F 60°, 45° and 30° inside risers
For technical information,
see p. 40-41
Fittings
All fittings have integral fishplates
No couplers required
1 SSB W F 90° bends
see p. 38-39
1 SSB W A F 60°, 45° and 30° bends

see p. 38-39
Additional gauges and finishes available Key : selecting SS light duty fittings. Replace the letters shown in red
to special order with your choice from the following options :
W = Widths (mm) : 50, 75, 100, 150, 225, 300
A = Angle (°) : 60, 45 and 30 (90 does not need to be included in order code)
Contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333 F = Finish : G (hot dip galvanised after manufacture)
PG (pre-galvanised), S (stainless steel)
16
Swifts® SS light duty cable tray 12
lengths and fittings or
18
Straight length
SSL 300 PG
Straight length
SSL 300 PG
90° inside riser

SSIR 300 PG 90° bend
SSB 300 PG

Dimensions and technical information : lengths (p. 36) ; fittings (p. 38-45)
Pack Cat. Nos. Fittings (continued) Pack Cat. Nos. Fittings (continued)
1 SSOR W F 90° outside risers 1 SSAR W F Adjustable risers
For technical information, For technical information,
see p. 40-41 see p. 42
1 SST W F Equal tees

1 SSOR W A F 60°, 45° and 30° outside risers For technical information,
For technical information, see p. 43
see p. 40-41
1 SSX W F 4 way crosspieces

see p. 44
1 SSR W K F Straight reducers

For technical information, W
see p. 45
K
Key : selecting SS light duty fittings. Replace the letters shown in red
with your choice from the following options :
Additional gauges and finishes available W = Widths (mm) : 50, 75, 100, 150, 225, 300
to special order A = Angle (°) : 60, 45 and 30 (90 does not need to be included in order code)
F = Finish : G (hot dip galvanised after manufacture)
PG (pre-galvanised), S (stainless steel)
Contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333 K = Narrowed width when using a reducer (mm) :
50, 75, 100, 150, 225
17
Swifts® MRF medium duty return flange cable tray
lengths and fittings
25
Universal bracket
MRFUB S
Straight length Straight length

MRFL 300 PG MFRL 300 PG
90° bend
90° inside riser MRFB 300 PG
MRFIR 300 PG

Dimensions and technical information : lengths (p. 46) ; coupler sets (p. 47-48) ; fittings (p. 50-61)
Pack Cat. Nos. Straight lengths – 3 m Pack Cat. Nos. Fittings
Width Depth Universal brackets and fishplates are used
(mm) (mm)
for on-site fabrication of fittings
1 MRFL 50 F 50 25
1 MRFL 75 F 75 25 5 MRFUB F Universal bracket
1 MRFL 100 F 100 25 Universal brackets can be used in a
1 MRFL 150 F 150 25 number of ways to achieve many change
1 MRFL 225 F 225 25 of direction and reducing functions
1 MRFL 300 F 300 25 Brackets can be folded
1 MRFL 450 F 450 25 into shape using a pair
1 MRFL 600 F 600 25 of pliers to create bends,
1 MRFL 750 F 750 25 tees, 4 way crosspieces etc
1 MRFL 900 F 900 25
D finish is not available in 50 mm
Over fold to split bracket
and join using fasteners to
Coupler sets create hinged couplers
Use to join straight lengths
For technical information, see p. 47-48
Standard couplers
1 MRFC 50 F For 50 mm wide tray
Supplied in packs containing 5 pairs of
brackets,100 fasteners, and power tool nut
1 MRFC F For 75-900 mm wide tray driver
Supplied in pairs Available in PG, G and S finishes
Quick bolt couplers G and PG versions supplied with quick bolt
Supplied in packs containing 25 pairs of fasteners
couplers, 100 quick bolt fasteners and S version supplied with M6 x 12 pan head
power tool attachment. For tray widths screws, nuts and washers
300 mm and above use two additional quick For technical information,
bolt fasteners (Cat. No. QBF) per coupler see p. 49
Not available for 50 mm wide MRF tray
Only available in PG and G Universal fishplates
1 MRQBC F 75-900 mm wide tray coupler Fishplates are designed for extra strength
1 QBF Pack of 100 M6 x 12 quick bolt fasteners when joining cable tray beds
Used with Cat. No. MRQBC. For tray widths They can also help to protectcables
300 mm and above use two additional from cut edges
quick bolt fasteners (Cat. No. QBF) per The universal fishplate
coupler can be overfolded and
Used to connect all MRF split at 75 mm centres
fittings when working with
For technical information, narrow trays
see p. 48 1 UF450 F
see p. 49
Additional gauges and finishes available

to special order Key : selecting MRF medium duty fittings. Replace the letters shown
in red with your choice from the following options :
Contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333 D (deep galvanised), PG (pre-galvanised steel),
S (stainless steel), E (powder coated)
18
Swifts® MRF medium duty return flange cable tray
lengths and fittings (continued)
25

MRFL 300 PG MFRL 300 PG
90° bend
90° inside riser MRFB 300 PG
MRFIR 300 PG

All fittings have integral couplers and 1 MRFAR W F Adjustable risers
fishplates. No couplers required (inside or outside)
1 MRFB W F 90° bends For technical information,
see p. 55
see p. 50-51
1 MRFB W A F 60°, 45° and 30° bends 1 MRFAXR W F Extra long adjustable risers
(inside or outside)
For 50-300 mm wide,
adjustable bends can The extra long adjustable riser can be used
also be used as an inside or outside riser for any angle
For technical information, up to 90°
see p. 50-51 For technical information,
see p. 56
1 MRFAB W F Adjustable bends
50-300 mm wide only
For technical 1 MRFT W F Equal tees
information, see p. 52-53 For technical information,
see p. 57
1 MRFIR W F 90° inside riser
see p. 54
1 MRFUT W B F Unequal tees W
1 MRFIR W A F 60°, 45°, 30° inside riser see p. 58-59
For technical information, B
W
see p. 54
1 MRFX W F 4 way crosspieces
1 MRFOR W F 90° outside riser For technical information,
see p. 54
1 MRFOR W A F 60°, 45°, 30° outside riser 1 MRFR W K F Straight reducers W

For technical information, see p. 61 K
see p. 54
Key : selecting MRF medium duty fittings. Replace the letters shown
W = Widths (mm) : 50, 75, 100, 150, 225, 300, 450, 600, 750, 900
B = Branch width (mm) : 50, 75, 100, 150, 225, 300, 450, 600, 750
D (deep galvanised), PG (pre-galvanised steel),
50, 75, 100, 150, 225, 300, 450, 600, 750
19
Swifts® SRF heavy duty return flange cable tray
50
Universal bracket
SRFUB PG
SRFL 300 PG SRFL 300 PG
90° bend
SRFB 300 PG
90° inside riser
SRFIR 300 PG

Width Depth Universal brackets and fishplates are used
(mm) (mm)
for on-site fabrication of fittings
1 SRFL 75 F 75 50
1 SRFL 100 F 100 50 5 SRFUB F Universal bracket
1 SRFL 150 F 150 50 Universal brackets can be used in a
1 SRFL 225 F 225 50 number of ways to achieve many change
1 SRFL 300 F 300 50 of direction and reducing functions
1 SRFL 450 F 450 50 Brackets can be folded
1 SRFL 600 F 600 50 into shape using a pair
1 SRFL 750 F 750 50 of pliers to create bends,
1 SRFL 900 F 900 50 tees, 4 way crosspieces etc
Coupler sets Over fold to split bracket

Use to join straight lengths and join using fasteners to
create hinged couplers
Standard couplers
see p. 63
1 SRFC F Supplied in pairs
Quick bolt couplers
Supplied in packs containing 25 pairs of Supplied in packs containing 5 pairs of
couplers, 100 quick bolt fasteners and brackets,100 fasteners, and power tool nut
power tool attachment. For tray widths 300 driver
mm and above use two additional quick Available in PG, G and S finishes
bolt fasteners (Cat. No. QBF) per coupler G and PG versions supplied with quick bolt
Only available in PG and G fasteners
1 SRQBC F Coupler suitable for all tray widths
1 QBF Pack of 100 M6 x 12 quick bolt fasteners S version supplied with M6 x 12 pan head
Used with Cat. No. SRQBC. For tray widths screws, nuts and washers
300 mm and above use two additional For technical information,
quick bolt fasteners (Cat. No. QBF) per see p. 65
coupler
Used to connect all SRF fittings Universal fishplates
For technical information, see p. 64 Fishplates are designed for extra strength
when joining cable tray beds
They can also help to protect cables
from cut edges
The universal fishplate
can be overfolded and
split at 75 mm centres
when working with
narrow trays
1 UF450 F
Additional gauges and finishes available

to special order Key : selecting SRF heavy duty fittings. Replace the letters shown
20
Swifts® SRF heavy duty return flange cable tray
50

SRFL 300 PG SRFL 300 PG
90° bend
SRFB 300 PG
90° inside riser
SRFIR 300 PG

All fittings have integral 1 SRFAR W F Adjustable risers
coupling tabs and fishplates (inside or outside)
1 SRFB W F 90° bends For technical information,
see p. 71
see p. 66-67
60°, 45° and 30° bends
1 SRFAXR W F Extra long
1 SRFB W A F For 75 - 300 mm wide, adjustable risers
adjustable bends can
also be used For technical information,
see p. 72
see p. 66-67
Adjustable bends
1 SRFAB W F 75 - 300mm wide only
see p. 68-69 1 SRFT W F Equal tees
see p. 73
1 SRFIR W F 90° inside riser
see p. 70 1 SRFUT W B F Unequal tees W
see p. 74-75
1 SRFIR W A F 60°, 45°, 30° inside riser W
B
see p. 70 1 SRFX W F 4 way crosspieces
see p. 76
1 SRFOR W F 90° outside riser
see p. 70 1 SRFR W K F Straight reducers
W
see p. 77
1 SRFOR W A F 60°, 45°, 30° outside riser
K
see p. 70
1 SRFMRFR W F SRF to MRF straight reducers
see p. 78
Key : selecting SRF heavy duty fittings. Replace the letters shown
W = Widths (mm) : 75, 100, 150, 225, 300, 450, 600, 750, 900
Additional gauges and finishes available B = Branch width (mm) : 75, 100, 150, 225, 300, 450, 600, 750
to special order F = Finish : G (hot dip galvanised after manufacture),
75, 100, 150, 225, 300, 450, 600, 750
21
Swifts® XRF extra heavy duty return flange cable tray
80
Straight length
XFRL 300 G
Straight length
XRFL 300 G
90° inside riser

XRFIR 300 G 90° bend
XRFB 300 G

Dimensions and technical information : lengths (p. 80) ; coupler sets (p. 81) ; fittings (p. 82-89)
Width Depth
(mm) (mm) All fittings have integral
1 XRFL 100 F 100 80 coupling tabs and fishplates
1 XRFL 150 F 150 80 No couplers required
1 XRFL 225 F 225 80 1 XRFB W F 90° bends
1 XRFL 300 F 300 80 For technical information,
1 XRFL 450 F 450 80 see p. 82-83
1 XRFL 600 F 600 80
Coupler sets 1 XRFB W A F 60°, 45° and 30° bends

1 XRFC F Use to join straight lengths see p. 82-83
Supplied in pairs
see p. 81
Additional gauges and finishes available Key : selecting XRF extra heavy duty fittings. Replace the letters shown
to special order in red with your choice from the following options :
W = Widths (mm) : 100, 150, 225, 300, 450, 600
Contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333 F = Finish : G (hot dip galvanised after manufacture),
D (deep galvanised), S (stainless steel)
22
Swifts® XRF extra heavy duty return flange cable tray
80
Straight length
XFRL 300 G
Straight length
XRFL 300 G
90° inside riser

XRFIR 300 G 90° bend
XRFB 300 G

Dimensions and technical information : lengths (p. 80) ; coupler sets (p. 81) ; fittings (p. 82-89)
All fittings have integral 1 XRFT W F Equal tees
coupling tabs and fishplates For technical information,
No couplers required see p. 86
1 XRFIR W F 90° inside riser
see p. 84-85
1 XRFUT W B F Unequal tees W
see p. 87
1 XRFIR W A F 60°, 45° and 30° inside riser
W
For technical information, B
see p. 84-85
1 XRFX W F 4 way crosspieces
see p. 88
1 XRFOR W F 90° outside riser
see p. 84-85
1 XRFR W K F Straight reducers
For technical information, W
see p. 89
K
1 XRFOR W A F 60°, 45° and 30° outside riser
see p. 84-85
Key : selecting XRF extra heavy duty fittings. Replace the letters shown
W = Widths (mm) : 100, 150, 225, 300, 450, 600
Additional gauges and finishes available A = Angle (°) : 60, 45 and 30 (90 does not need to be included in order code)
to special order B = Branch width (mm) : 100, 150, 225, 300, 450
100, 150, 225, 300, 450
23
Swifts® cable tray supports
SS light duty, MRF medium duty, SRF heavy duty, 12
XRF extra heavy duty
or
25 50 80
18
LCA 300 G
LCB 150 G
CKP 25 OH 150 PG LTH 300 PG

STB 300 PG
STB 450 PG
Dimensions and technical information (p. 90-94)
Pack Cat. Nos. Supports Pack Cat. Nos. Supports (continued)

Light duty cantilever arms Light duty trapeze hangers
Supplied singly without fasteners Supplied singly without fasteners
Fit horizontal runs of tray to flat surfaces Support horizontal runs of tray from
and Swiftrack channel. Suitable for all overhead structures
tray widths Up to 450 mm wide use M10 threaded
For technical information, see p. 90 rods. For 600 mm wide and above use
1 LCA 100 F 100 mm M12 threaded rods
1 LCA 150 F 150 mm For technical information,
1 LCA 225 F 225 mm see p. 93
1 LCA 300 F 300 mm 1 LTH 50 F 50 mm
1 LCA 450 F 450 mm 1 LTH 75 F 75 mm
1 LCA 600 F 600 mm 1 LTH 100 F 100 mm
1 LCA 750 F 750 mm 1 LTH 150 F 150 mm
1 LCA 900 F 900 mm
1 LTH 225 F 225 mm
Light duty cantilever brackets 1 LTH 300 F 300 mm
Supplied singly without fasteners 1 LTH 450 F 450 mm
Fit horizontal runs of lightly loaded tray 1 LTH 600 F 600 mm
up to 150 mm wide to flat surfaces and 1 LTH 750 F 750 mm
Swiftrack channel 1 LTH 900 F 900 mm
50-75 mm not available in D finish
100-150 mm not available in D, PG
or S finishes
For technical information, Stand-off brackets
see p. 91 Supplied singly without fasteners
1 LCB 50 F 50 mm Fit vertical or horizontal runs
1 LCB 75 F 75 mm of tray to vertical surfaces,
1 LCB 100 F 100 mm floors and Swiftrack channel 40 mm
LCB 150 F 150 mm 50 and 75 100 and 150
1 (G and E only) For technical information,
see p. 94
Easi-clip
1 STB 50 F 50 mm
50 CKP 25 Used to connect MRF tray 1 STB 75 F 75 mm
to Swiftrack channel 1 STB 100 F 100 mm
Zinc coated finish 1 STB 150 F 150 mm
1 STB 225 F 225 mm
1 STB 300 F 300 mm 60 mm
Overhead hangers
Supplied singly without fasteners
Support horizontal runs of lightly loaded
tray up to 150 mm wide from 1 STB 450 F 450 mm
overhead structures 1 STB 600 F 600 mm
Use M10 1 STB 750 F 750 mm
threaded rod 1 STB 900 F 900 mm
For technical
information,
see p. 92
1 OH 50 F 50 mm
1 OH 75 F 75 mm
1 OH 100 F 100 mm
1 OH 150 F 150 mm
Key : selecting supports. Replace the letters shown in red with your
choice from the following options :
D (deep galvanised), PG (pre-galvanised)
24
Swifts® cable tray ancillary items
12
and covers or
18
25 50 80
SS light duty, MRF medium duty, SRF heavy duty,
Straight ventilated cover

MRFCV 300 G
Earth continuity
PTFEB
Straight closed cover Divider

MRFCC 300 G 90° bend ventilated cover
MRFDV G
MRFBCV 300 G
Pack Cat. Nos. Ancillary items (continued)

Ventilated covers for fittings
Dimensions and technical information (p. 95-101) Supplied singly with
fasteners and brackets
Pack Cat. Nos. Ancillary items Add CV before the
width of your completed
Dividers – 3 m fitting Cat. No.
Supplied singly without fasteners Examples shown are for an unequal tee
Used to separate different types or groups with a 150 branch off a 300 run, hot dip
of cable within one cable tray run galvanised
1 SSDV F For SS 1 SS - For SS. Example : SSUT CV 300 150 G
1 MRFDV F For MRF 1 MRF - For MRF. Example : MRFUT CV 300 150 G
1 SRFDV F For SRF 1 SRF - For SRF. Example : SRFUT CV 300 150 G
1 XRFDV F For XRF 1 XRF - For XRF. Example : XRFUT CV 300 150 G
For technical information, For technical information, see p. 99-100
see p. 95
Fishplates
Earth continuity connectors Fishplates are designed for extra strength
20 PTFEB Fasteners not included when joining cable tray beds
Use M6 x 12 mm roofing nuts and bolts Supplied singly without fastenings
Copper braid and copper lugs both in To select correct fishplate, refer to table
electrotinned finish on p. 63
Length between centres : 93 mm
Conductor area : 4 mm2 1 FF For SS and XRF
see p. 96
Straight closed covers – 3 m 1 MF F For XRF
Supplied singly with fasteners and brackets
1 SSCC W F For SS
1 MRFCC W F For MRF
1 SRFCC W F For SRF 1 WF F For SS, MRF, SRF
1 XRFCC W F For XRF and XRF
For technical information, For technical
see p. 97-98 information, see p. 101
Straight ventilated covers – 3 m Universal fishplates
Supplied singly with fasteners and brackets Fishplates are designed for extra strength
1 SSCV W F For SS when joining cable tray beds
1 MRFCV W F For MRF They can also help to protect cables
1 SRFCV W F For SRF from cut edges
1 XRFCV W F For XRF The universal fishplate
For technical information, can be overfolded and
see p. 97-98 split at 75 mm centres
when working with
Closed covers for fittings narrow trays
Supplied singly with 1 UF450 F Can be used in
fasteners and brackets conjunction with
Add CC before the width universal bracket, see p. 101
of your completed
fitting Cat. No. Finish renovation materials
Examples shown are 1 AGALVPAINT Galvafroid Paint 400 ml
for an unequal tee with a 150 branch off a 1 AEPOXYPAINT 2-pack Epoxy paste 1 litre
300 run, hot dip galvanised
1 SS - For SS. Example : SSUT CC 300 150 G
1 MRF - For MRF. Example : MRFUT CC 300 150 G Key : selecting ancillary items. Replace the letters shown in red with
1 SRF - For SRF. Example : SRFUT CC 300 150 G your choice from the following options :
1 XRF - For XRF. Example : XRFUT CC 300 150 G W = Widths (mm) : 50, 75, 100, 150, 225, 300, 450, 600, 750, 900
For technical information, see p. 99-100 F = Finish : G (hot dip galvanised after manufacture),
D (deep galvanised), PG (pre-galvanised)
25
Swifts® cable tray fasteners
SS light duty, MRF medium duty, SRF heavy duty, 12
or
25 50 80
18
QBF
RC08
RB0620
RBGO612
TR08 RWG06
RB0620 S
Pack Cat. Nos. Fasteners Pack Cat. Nos. Fasteners (continued)

Quick bolt fasteners Threaded rods
100 QBF Pack of 100 M6 x 12 quick bolt fasteners 1 TR06 M6 x 3 m electroplated zinc
Used with Cat. Nos. MRQBC and SRQBC 1 TR08 M8 x 3 m electroplated zinc
For tray widths 300 mm 1 TR10 M10 x 3 m electroplated zinc
and above use two additional 1 TR12 M12 x 3 m electroplated zinc
quick bolt fasteners
(Cat. Nos. QBF) per coupler
Used to connect all MRF and SRF fittings
Roofing nuts and bolts

Threaded rod connectors
200 RB0612 M6 x 12 electroplated zinc
200 RB0616 M6 x 16 electroplated zinc 1 RC06 M6 electroplated zinc
100 RBG0612 M6 x 12 hot dip galvanised
100 RBG0616 M6 x 16 hot dip galvanised
100 RB0612 S M6 x 12 stainless steel
Roofing washers
500 RWG06 M6 hot dip galvanised
26
Swiftrack channel support system
channels and channel nuts
PN101
SC400 3M
SC410 3M SC403 3M PN102 PN100
SC401 3M
Typical applications (p. 134-135)

Channel and brackets are manufactured to BS 6946 – specifications for metal channel cable support systems for electrical installations and
calculations for loading are in accordance with BS 5950 : Part 5 1998 structural use of steelwork in buildings, code of practice for cold formed
thin gauge sections
Pack Cat. Nos. Single channels - plain Pack Cat. Nos. Single channels - slotted
The standard finish for channel is For technical information, see p. 102
pre-galvanised mild steel to BS EN 10346 Standard channel
For other finishes add the appropriate suffix
G = hot dip galvanised after manufacture to 1 SC203 3M 41 x 21 mm, 3 m length
BS EN ISO 1461 1 SC203 6M 41 x 21 mm, 6 m length
S = stainless steel to BS EN 10088 2 grade
1·4404 (equivalent to S316L31) 1 SC403 3M 41 x 41 mm, 3 m length
Channels SC210 and SC410 are not 1 SC403 6M 41 x 41 mm, 6 m length
available in S finish
Examples : Light gauge channel
SC200 3M G for hot dip galvanised 1 SC213 3M 41 x 21 mm, 3 m length
SC400 3M S for stainless steel
1 SC413 3M 41 x 41 mm, 3 m length
Standard channel
1 SC200 3M 41 x 21 mm, 3 m length Channel nuts
1 SC200 6M 41 x 21 mm, 6 m length
For use with all channel
1 SC400 3M 41 x 41 mm, 3 m length M12 channel nuts should always be used
1 SC400 6M 41 x 41 mm, 6 m length for maximum load conditions
The standard finish for all nuts is
Light gauge channel zinc plated to BS 3382 : Part 2
1 SC210 3M 41 x 21 mm, 3 m length For stainless steel, add the suffix S
Example : PN101S
For hot dip galvanised, add the suffix G
1 SC410 3M 41 x 41 mm, 3 m length Example : PN101G
Fasteners :
Use hexagon head setscrews, see p. 31
Back-to-back channel
For technical information
see p. 103 Long springs
1 SC401 3M 41 x 83 mm, 3 m length For use with 41 mm deep channel
1 SC401 6M 41 x 83 mm, 6 m length 100 PN061 M6
100 PN081 M8
100 PN101 M10
100 PN121 M12
Short springs
For use with 21 mm deep channel
100 PN062 M6
100 PN082 M8
100 PN102 M10
100 PN122 M12
No springs
Other fasteners and finishes available to For use on all channel depths
special order 100 PN060 M6
100 PN080 M8
100 PN100 M10
Contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333 100 PN120 M12
27
cantilever arms
SA756
SA762
SA772
LCA 300 PG
SA792
SA752
SA757
Pack Cat. Nos. Cantilever arms Pack Cat. Nos. Cantilever arms (continued)
In addition to the cantilever arms listed, there Cantilever arms,
are many other specialist support brackets double channel
for use with cable ladder
Two bolt fixing with extra support
These are detailed in the relevant sections in Open face top and bottom
this catalogue
Cantilever arms 1 SA770 150 mm
Requires only one bolt for quick fixing and is 1 SA771 225 mm
used with open face at the top 1 SA772 300 mm
For technical information, see p. 104 1 SA773 450 mm
1 SA750 150 mm 1 SA774 600 mm
1 SA751 225 mm 1 SA775 750 mm
1 SA752 300 mm 1 SA776 900 mm
1 SA753 450 mm Cantilever arm bracket
1 SA754 600 mm
1 SA755 750 mm 1 SA756 Used to provide extra support
1 SA757 900 mm to a horizontal run of channel
Cantilever arms, see p. 105
universal
Two bolt fixing. Can be used with open face
at the top or bottom Light duty cantilever arms
For technical information, Used to support horizontal
see p. 104 runs of tray on to a vertical
1 SA760 150 mm length of channel
1 SA761 225 mm For technical information, see p. 90
1 SA762 300 mm 1 LCA 100 F 100 mm
1 SA763 450 mm 1 LCA 150 F 150 mm
1 SA764 600 mm 1 LCA 225 F 225 mm
1 SA765 750 mm 1 LCA 300 F 300 mm
1 SA766 900 mm 1 LCA 450 F 450 mm
1 LCA 600 F 600 mm
Cantilever arms, 1 LCA 750 F 750 mm
side 1 LCA 900 F 900 mm
Two bolt fixing. Can be used with open face
on the left or right
1 SA790 150 mm
1 SA791 225 mm
1 SA792 300 mm
1 SA793 450 mm
1 SA794 600 mm
1 SA795 750 mm
1 SA796 900 mm
Non-standard cantilever arms available to

special order Key : Replace the letters shown in red with your choice from the
following options :
28
framework brackets
90° brackets
43 43
48
48 99
54 88
88
54 99
Cat. No. SB500 Cat. No. SB501 Cat. No. SB502 Cat. No. SB503 Cat. No. SB504
43 45
54 43 90 50 130 88
90 90 90
50
95
99 144
99
133
45
45 45
45
20 20 20
Square and splice plates

Square plates Splice plate (1)
Splice plate (1)
Splice plate (1)
Splice plate (1)
20 20
Hole 20
40 Cat. Nos. size 20
85 130 175 40 220
SB506 06 M6 40
40 40
SB506 08 M8 40
SB506 10 M10 20 20 20 20
SB506 12 M12
– Cat. No. SB507 Cat. No. SB508 Cat. No. SB509 Cat. No. SB510
Z brackets U brackets
47 48
141 141
48
54 54
27 (2)
48 27 48
Cat. No. SB511 Cat. No. SB513 Cat. No. SB514 Cat. No. SB515
Angle brackets
Obtuse angle brackets Acute angle brackets
Cat. Nos. Angle Cat. Nos. Angle
90
SB520 15° SB532 45°
SB524 45° ϑ SB534 60°
ϑ SB526 60° SB536 75°
SB528 75° 90
T plates and brackets

T plate T plate T bracket Cross plate 90° T bracket 45° T bracket
120 48
40 48
130 90 40 45
50 45°
80
140
140
50 50 48
90 90 40 138
51
(3) (3)
Cat. No. SB554 Cat. No. SB555 Cat. No. SB603 Cat. No. SB603+ Cat. No. SB606 Cat. No. SB607
(1) Splice plates – holes spaced at 45 mm centres
(2) Hole on one side of bracket only
(3) SB606 and SB607 are not available in S (stainless steel) finish
➔ For technical information : see p. 106-109
29
framework brackets (continued)
Jointing brackets and channels Base plates

Channel jointing 41 Jointing channel Jointing channel Single channel Double
bracket for SC200 for SC400 base plate channel
channel channel base plate
40 40
40
175
95
85 175
140 190 80
98 48 80
23
45
L brackets Wing brackets

L bracket Right hand Left hand 54 49
80
40 90 L corner L corner 90
bracket bracket 86
88
80
49
Angled
150 2 lug wing 150
3 lug wing wing
bracket bracket bracket
Cat. No. SB600 Cat. No. SB601 (2)
Cat. No. SB602 (2)
Cat. No. SB700 Cat. No. SB701 Cat. No. SB707 (2)
Gusseted brackets Shelf brackets

20 Single channel Double channel
20
gusseted bracket gusseted bracket
55
175 55 175
55
55
Outer 88
Outer
holes holes
Ø20 Ø20
43 84 99
252 293
45 63 45 63
20 20
Cat. No. SB702 Cat. No. SB706 Cat. No. SB703
Beam, window beam and toe beam clamps

Beam clamp (3)
Beam clamp (3)
Window beam clamp (3)
Window beam clamp (3)
Beam clamp (3)
(1) 40
(1)
40 80
25
(1) 40 (1)
40 80
28
(1) 80
30
(1)
65 (1)
87 128
(1)
65
(1)
25
(1) (1) 22
(1) 22
48 47 (1) 22
Cat. No. SC850 Cat. No. SC851 Cat. No. SC852/21 Cat. No. SC852/41 Cat. No. SC852/82
Beam clamp (3)
Beam clamp (3)
Toe beam clamp (3)
Beam clamp (3)
Beam clamp (3)
Beam clamp (3)
(1) 46
(1) 23 40 80
46
(1)
67
(1)
80 12
(1)
(1) 20
(1) 12
(1)
17
19
110°
(1) 37
ø8
Cat. No. SC853 Cat. No. SC854 Cat. No. SC856 (4)
Cat. No. ZC1 (5)
Cat. No. FL2 (5)
Cat. No. SC855
Pipe clamps(6) Channel accessories

Pipe Pipe Channel end caps (7)
Channel end caps (8)
Closure strips
diameter diameter
Cat. Nos. (mm) Cat. Nos. (mm) Cat. Nos. Cat. Nos.
SC950B SC951B
SP960 10-14 SP975 62-71 SC950W SC951W
SP964 17-22 SP976 73-83
SP965 22-26
SP968 25-35
3000 Cat. Nos.
SP969 32-42
SC952
SP972 42-59
SC953
SP973 54-65
– – – – –
(1) Indicates inside dimensions (2) SB601, SB602 and SB707 are not available in S (stainless steel) finish
(3) Beam clamps are supplied with nuts, bolts, cone point screws and U bolts where shown (4) Requires 2 setscrews and channel nuts for fixing (not included)
(5) Stainless steel finish is not available (6) All pipe clamps are available in pre-galvanised and stainless steel finishes
(7) For SC400, SC401 and SC403 channels (8) For SC200, SC201 and SC203 channels
30
Swiftrack channel support systems
standard fixings and fasteners
Hexagon head Cone point Hexagon Electroplated Hot dip

setscrews screws nuts roofing nuts galvanised
and bolts roofing nuts
and bolts
Pack Cat. Nos. Size Pack Cat. Nos. Size
Hexagon head setscrews Cone point screws

ELECTROPLATED ZINC ELECTROPLATED ZINC
200 SS0616 M6 x 16 100 CP1035 M10 x 35
200 SS0620 M6 x 20 STAINLESS STEEL
200 SS0625 M6 x 25 100 CP1035 S M10 x 35
200 SS0630 M6 x 30 Hexagon nuts
200 SS0820 M8 x 20 ELECTROPLATED ZINC
200 SS0825 M8 x 25 500 HN06 M6
200 SS0830 M8 x 30 500 HN08 M8
200 SS0835 M8 x 35 200 HN10 M10
200 SS0840 M8 x 40 200 HN12 M12
200 SS0850 M8 x 50 Roofing nuts and bolts
200 SS1016 M10 x 16 ELECTROPLATED ZINC
200 SS1020 M10 x 20 200 RB0612 M6 x 12
200 SS1025 M10 x 25 200 RB0616 M6 x 16
200 SS1030 M10 x 30 200 RB0620 M6 x 20
100 SS1035 M10 x 35 200 RB0625 M6 x 25
100 SS1040 M10 x 40 100 RB0630 M6 x 30
100 SS1045 M10 x 45 100 RB0640 M6 x 40
100 SS1050 M10 x 50 100 RB0650 M6 x 50
100 SS1060 M10 x 60 HOT DIP GALVANISED
100 SS1220 M12 x 20 100 RBG0612 M6 x 12
100 SS1225 M12 x 25 100 RBG0616 M6 x 16
100 SS1230 M12 x 30 STAINLESS STEEL
100 SS1235 M12 x 35 100 RB0612 S M6 x 12
100 SS1240 M12 x 40 100 RB0616 S M6 x 16
100 SS1250 M12 x 50 100 RB0620 S M6 x 20
HOT DIP GALVANISED
200 SSG0612 M6 x 12
200 SSG0616 M6 x 16
200 SSG0620 M6 x 20
200 SSG0635 M6 x 35
31
Swiftrack channel support systems
standard fixings and fasteners (continued)
Flat Roofing Penny Shakeproof Tray Threaded Threaded rod Eye

washers washers washers washers washers rods connectors bolts
Pack Cat. Nos. Size Pack Cat. Nos. Size
Flat washers Threaded rod

ELECTROPLATED ZINC ELECTROPLATED ZINC
500 FW06 M6 3m TR06 M6 x 3 m
500 FW08 M8 3m TR08 M8 x 3 m
500 FW10 M10 3m TR10 M10 x 3 m
200 FW12 M12 3m TR12 M12 x 3 m
Roofing washers Threaded rod connectors
HOT DIP GALVANISED ELECTROPLATED ZINC
500 RWG06 M6 1 RC06 M6
Penny washers 1 RC08 M8
ELECTROPLATED ZINC 1 RC10 M10
400 PW06 M6 x 25 1 RC12 M12
400 PW08 M8 x 25 Eye bolts
400 PW10 M10 x 38 ELECTROPLATED ZINC
400 PW12 M12 x 40 1 EB06 M6 x 80
Shakeproof washers 1 EB08 M8 x 80
ELECTROPLATED ZINC 1 EB10 M10 x 80
400 SW06 M6
400 SW08 M8
400 SW10 M10
400 SW12 M12
Tray washers
ELECTROPLATED ZINC
400 TW06 M6 x 20
HOT DIP GALVANISED
100 TWG06 M6 x 20
32
Ceiling support system
heavy duty
End plate profile
Ceiling support Extension profile
Dimensions and technical information (p. 111)
The dedicated ceiling support system allows for a flexible, multi-tiered approach for single or double sided loads with a maximum cantilever arm width
of 700 mm to accept Swifts cable trays up to 600 mm wide, either lidded or unlidded
Pack Cat. Nos. Support system Pack Cat. Nos. Support system (continued)
Ceiling supports Cantilever arms
Including protection end cap Fix to profile with 1 x M10 x 25 mm hexagon
Ceiling fixings not included bolt + washer + hexagon nut
Length Width
1 87665 02 200 mm 1 5572 33 200 mm
1 87665 03 300 mm 1 5572 43 300 mm
1 87665 04 400 mm 1 5572 53 400 mm
1 87665 05 500 mm 1 5572 63 500 mm
1 87665 06 600 mm 1 5572 73 600 mm
1 87665 07 700 mm 1 5573 83 700 mm
1 87665 08 800 mm
1 87665 09 900 mm
1 87665 10 1 000 mm
1 87665 11 1 100 mm
1 87665 12 1 200 mm
1 87665 13 1 300 mm
1 87665 14 1 400 mm
1 87665 15 1 500 mm
1 87665 16 1 600 mm
1 87665 18 1 800 mm
1 87665 20 2 000 mm
Extension profiles
1 87665 30 3 000 mm
1 87665 45 4 500 mm
Ceiling bracket
1 87665 50 Lock to profile with 2 x M10 x 25 mm
hexagon bolt + washer + hexagon nut
Adjustable between -30° and +30°
End plate profile

Profile connector
➔ For fasteners, see p. 31-32

➔ For technical information, see p. 111
33
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
IN THIS SECTION
SWIFTS CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS
SS light duty cable tray
Straight lengths and coupling detail 36-37
Flat bends 38-39
Inside, outside and adjustable risers 40-42
Equal tees 43
MRF medium duty return flange cable tray
Straight lengths 46
Couplers sets 47-48
Flat and adjustable bends 50-53
Adjustable and extra long adjustable risers 55-56
Equal and unequal tees 57-59
SRF heavy duty return flange cable tray
Straight lengths 62
Couplers sets 63-64
Flat and adjustable bends 66-69
Adjustable and extra long adjustable risers 71-72
SRF to MRF straight reducers 78
Handed reducers 79
XRF extra heavy duty return flange cable tray
Straight lengths 80
Couplers sets 81
Flat bends 82-83
Inside and outside risers 84-85
Supports 90-94
Ancillary items and covers 95-101
SWIFTRACK CHANNEL SUPPORT SYSTEM
Single channels – plain and slotted 102
Back-to-back channels 103
Assembly – fasteners and channel nuts 103
Cantilever arms 104-105
Framework brackets 106-109
Beam clamps, pipe clamps and accessories 109-110
Heavy duty 111
35
Swifts® SS light duty 12
straight lengths or
18
■ Dimensions and weights ■ Loading graphs
225-300 mm Load tests carried out to BS EN 61537
widths The loads shown on all graphs are the safe recommended maximum
loads that can be applied and must include wind, snow and any other
external forces in addition to the cable load
The graphs show the maximum load for tray installed at a support
spacing within its recommended range
When the graph line is above the intersection of the required load and
span lines, the support equipment is suitable for use within those load
and span conditions
Cat. No. SSL W F 250
For cable load capacity

200
Maximum safe working load (kg/m)

see loading graphs opposite 50-150 mm
widths
Dimensions
150
Standard length 3 m
Plan view Plan view
15·5 22 nominal 300
100
15 x 7 x 3·5R
20 x 7 x 3·5R
2
25
50
100 joggle
25
25
150
25
25
0
0·5 1·0 1·5
15·5
9·5
Width
37·5 37·5 19 Span (m)
(50-150 typical)
For lengths 450 mm wide and greater, the addition of fishplate
t End view Cat. No. WF F across the underside of the length-to-length joint provides
12 added strength and increases the safe working load, see p. 101
Width ■ Finishes and standards

50 to 225
Standard stocked finish :
t G Hot dip galvanised after manufacture to BS EN ISO 1461 : 2009
End view
18 PG Pre-galvanised steel to BS EN 10346 : 2009 grade DX51D
Additional finishes :
Width S Stainless steel to BS EN 10088 – 2 grade 1·4404
300 and above (equivalent to 316L31)
Note
R = radius
50 mm wide not available in deep galvanised (D) finish
Gauges and weights
The gauge ‘t’ for each cable tray width and finish can vary by Sheared steel (particularly stainless steel)
product and range
Non-standard gauges and finishes are available to special order,
does have relatively sharp edges and protective
contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333 gloves must be worn during handling
Width Weight Gauge All weights given are in
Cat. Nos. (mm) (kg) t (mm) kilograms (kg) and are for a
SSL50G 50 1·4 0·9 3m straight length in hot dip
SSL50PG 50 1·2 0·9 galvanised G finish
SSL50S 50 1·7 1·2 To obtain the appropriate
component weight in other
SSL75G 75 1·8 0·9 finishes, multiply the given
SSL75PG 75 1·7 0·9 weight by the following factors :
SSL75S 75 2·2 1·2 Stainless steel (S) x 0·94
SSL100G 100 2·3 0·9 Pre-galvanised (PG) x 0·96
SSL100PG 100 2·1 0·9
SSL100S 100 2·9 1·2
SSL150G 150 3·3 0·9
SSL150PG 150 2·8 0·9
SSL150S 150 4·1 1·2
SSL225G 225 5·2 0·9
SSL225PG 225 4·8 0·9
SSL225S 225 7·4 1·5 All dimensions (mm) are nominal
SSL300G 300 10·4 1·5
SSL300PG 300 9·0 1·4 Key : Replace the letter shown in red with your choice from the
SSL300S 300 10·0 1·5 following options :
➔ Fishplates : see p. 101
36
Swifts® SS light duty
straight lengths (continued)
■ Coupling detail
Straight
STRAIGHT length
TRAY1
All SS straight lengths have one end
joggled to allow jointing without a
separate coupler, see illustration
Slide joggled end of length 1 inside
length 2 before fastening
Straight
STRAIGHT length
TRAY2
Note
Quantity of bed fasteners
50 - 225 mm = 4, 300 mm = 6
Fasteners (not included)
For G and
PG finish
A
A M6 x 12 roofing bolt
B Roofing washer
C M6 square nut
B C D E D Straight length
E Straight length
For S finish F M6 x 12 panhead screw
F G M6 form A washer
H M6 hexagon nut
G H D E
Fastener finishes
For flat bends with G and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised or zinc
plated. For flat bends with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
Key : Replace the letter shown in red with your choice from the
following options :
All dimensions (mm) are nominal
37
Swifts® SS light duty fittings 12
flat bends – 90°, 60°, 45° and 30° or
18
■ 90° flat bends – dimensions and weights ■ 45° flat bends – dimensions and weights
Cat. No. SSB W F Cat. No. SSB W 45 F
45° Y
90° Y
Z
Z Width
Width X
X Weight
Cat. Nos. Width X Y Z (kg)
Weight SSB 50 45 F 50 66 73 32 0·1
SSB 75 45 F 75 91 91 32 0·1
SSB 50F 50 100 100 32 0·1
SSB 100 45 F 100 116 108 32 0·2
SSB 75F 75 125 125 32 0·2
SSB 150 45 F 150 166 144 32 0·3
SSB 100F 100 150 150 32 0·3
SSB 225 45 F 225 238 193 57 0·5
SSB 150F 150 200 200 32 0·5
SSB 300 45 F 300 315 248 57 0·8
SSB 225F 225 275 275 57 1·0
SSB 300F 300 350 350 57 1·5
■ 30° flat bends – dimensions and weights
Cat. No. SSB W 30 F
Cat. No. SSB W 60 F
30° Y
60° Y
Z
Width
Z X
Width Weight
X SSB 50 30 F 50 57 50 32 0·1
Weight
SSB 75 30 F 75 82 63 32 0·1
Cat. Nos. Width X Y Z (kg) SSB 100 30 F 100 107 75 32 0·1
SSB 50 60 F 50 78 89 32 0·1 SSB 150 30 F 150 157 100 32 0·2
SSB 75 60 F 75 103 110 32 0·1 SSB 225 30 F 225 229 138 57 0·4
SSB 100 60 F 100 125 131 32 0·2 SSB 300 30 F 300 307 175 57 0·7
SSB 150 60 F 150 175 173 32 0·3
SSB 225 60 F 225 250 238 57 0·6
SSB 300 60 F 300 325 303 57 1·0
following options :
38
flat bends – 90°, 60°, 45° and 30° or
18
■ Dimensions and weights – flat bends 90°, 60°, 45° and 30° ■ Assembly – flat bends 90°, 60°, 45° and 30° (continued)
Dimensions Minimum bend radius for cables – flat bends 90°
X = Length of fitting from each end (excluding integral coupler)
Y = Length of fitting from each end (excluding integral coupler)
Z = End extension of integral coupler
Weights
All weights given are in kilograms (kg) and are for hot dip
galvanised G finish
To obtain the appropriate component weight in other finishes, multiply 50
the given weight by the following factors :
Stainless steel (S) x 0·94
Pre-galvanised (PG) x 0·96
■ Assembly – flat bends 90°, 60°, 45° and 30°

Minimum cable radius = 50 mm
Coupling detail Minimum bend radius for cables – flat bends 60°, 45° and 30°
Straight
Straightlength
tray
Flat
Flat bend
bend
Note 50
50 - 225 mm = 4, 300 mm = 6
Fasteners (not included) Minimum cable radius = 50 mm
For G and
PG finish
A
B Roofing washer
C M6 square nut
E Straight length
H M6 hexagon nut
G H D E
Fastener finishes
For flat bends with G and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised or zinc
plated. For flat bends with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
following options :
39
inside and outside risers – 90°, 60°, 45° and 30° or
18
■ 90° inside and outside risers – dimensions and weights ■ 45° inside and outside risers – dimensions and weights
90° inside 90° outside 45° inside 45° outside
riser riser riser riser
Z
Radius
Z
Radius
Y Radius
Y
X Z
Radius Z
Z
X
Y
Z
Y Weight
X Cat. Nos. Width X Y Z(1) (kg)
SSIR 50 30 F 50 147 61 55 0·1
Weight
Cat. Nos. Width X Y Z(1) (kg) SSIR 75 30 F 75 147 61 55 0·2
SSIR 50 F 50 130 130 55 0·2 SSIR 100 30 F 100 147 61 55 0·2
SSIR 75 F 75 130 130 55 0·2 SSIR 150 30 F 150 147 61 55 0·3
SSIR 100 F 100 130 130 55 0·3 SSIR 225 30 F 225 200 83 55 0·6
SSIR 150 F 150 130 130 55 0·4 SSIR 300 30 F 300 200 83 55 0·7
SSIR 225 F 225 205 205 55 1·0 (1) End extension measurement applies to both ends of the fitting
SSIR 300 F 300 205 205 55 1·3 Cat. Nos. given in the table are for inside risers. For outside risers
substitute SOR for SIR
(1) End extension measurement applies to both ends of the fitting
Inside and outside risers are not available in PG finish
Cat. Nos. given in the table are for inside risers. For outside risers
For risers in PG finish use adjustable risers for all angles up to 90°,
see p. 42
For risers in PG finish use adjustable risers for all angles up to 90°, ■ 30° inside and outside risers – dimensions and weights
see p. 42
■ 60° inside and outside risers – dimensions and weights

30° inside 30° outside
riser riser
60° inside 60° outside 4
riser riser X
Radius
X
Radius
Radius
Y
Y Z
Radius
Z
Z X
Y
Z
X Weight
Y Cat. Nos. Width X Y Z(1) (kg)
SSIR 50 45 F 50 140 37 55 0·1
Weight
Cat. Nos. Width X Y Z (1)
(kg) SSIR 75 45 F 75 140 37 55 0·2
SSIR 50 60 F 50 147 85 55 0·2 SSIR 100 45 F 100 140 37 55 0·2
SSIR 75 60 F 75 147 85 55 0·2 SSIR 150 45 F 150 140 37 55 0·3
SSIR 100 60 F 100 147 85 55 0·3 SSIR 225 45 F 225 177 47 55 0·7
SSIR 150 60 F 150 147 85 55 0·4 SSIR 300 45 F 300 177 47 55 0·7
SSIR 225 60 F 225 212 122 55 0·8 (1) End extension measurement applies to both ends of the fitting
SSIR 300 60 F 300 212 122 55 1·0 Cat. Nos. given in the table are for inside risers. For outside risers
(1) End extension measurement applies to both ends of the fitting Inside and outside risers are not available in PG finish
Cat. Nos. given in the table are for inside risers. For outside risers For risers in PG finish use adjustable risers for all angles up to 90°,
substitute SOR for SIR see p. 42
For risers in PG finish use adjustable risers for all angles up to 90°,
see p. 42
following options :
40
inside and outside risers – 90°, 60°, 45° and 30° or
18
■ Dimensions and weights – inside and outside risers
90°, 60°, 45° and 30°
Dimensions
X = Overall length of fitting from each end in the horizontal (including
integral coupler)
Y = Overall length of fitting from each end in the vertical (including
integral coupler)
Weights
galvanised G finish
To obtain the appropriate component weight in other finishes, multiply
■ Assembly – inside and outside risers 90°, 60°, 45° and 30°
Coupling detail
Straight
Straightlength
tray
Riser
Flat bend
Note
50 - 225 mm wide tray = 4
300 mm wide tray = 6

For G and
PG finish
A
B Roofing washer
C M6 square nut
E Straight length
H M6 hexagon nut
G H D E
Fastener finishes
For risers with G finish, fasteners are galvanised or zinc plated
For risers with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
Flange detail
Notches in flange vary depending on type and size of riser
Inside / outside riser

Widths 50 to 225
Inside riser
Widths 300
Outside riser
Widths 300
41
adjustable risers or
18
■ Dimensions and weights ■ Assembly
Adjustable risers can be used as an inside or outside riser for any As many riser segments as necessary may be inserted into the end of
angle up to 90° the straight length, thus avoiding the need for cutting
Minimum radius = 200 mm
Maximum radius = 300 mm
Overall length when flat = 554 mm
Dimensions
Cat. No. SSAR W F
Used
Used as
as Used as
Used as
inside
insideriser
riser outside riser
outside riser
30
Coupling detail
45 Straight
Straightlength
tray
90
60
60
90
Adjustable
Flat bendriser
Note
45 Quantity of bed fasteners
30
For G and
PG finish
A
90°
B Roofing washer
C M6 square nut
E Straight length
90° F G M6 form A washer
H M6 hexagon nut
Weight
Cat. Nos. Width (kg)
SSAR 50 F 50 0·4 G H D E
SSAR 75 F 75 0·6
Fastener finishes
SSAR 100 F 100 0·8 For adjustable risers with G and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised
SSAR 150 F 150 1·0 or zinc plated
SSAR 225 F 225 1·5 For adjustable risers with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
SSAR 300 F 300 2·0
Weights
galvanised G finish
following options :
42
equal tees or
18
■ Equal tees dimensions and weights ■ Assembly
Dimensions Coupling detail
Cat. No. SST W F
Straight
Straightlength
tray
Equal tee
Flat bend
Width X
Note

Z
For G and
PG finish
Width
A
X = Length of fitting from each end (excluding integral coupler) A M6 x 12 roofing bolt
Z = End extension of integral coupler B Roofing washer
C M6 square nut
Weight B C D E D Straight length
Cat. Nos. Width X Z (kg) E Straight length
SST 50 F 50 167 32 0·2 For S finish F M6 x 12 panhead screw
SST 75 F 75 192 32 0·2 F G M6 form A washer
H M6 hexagon nut
SST 100 F 100 217 32 0·4
SST 150 F 150 267 32 0·6
SST 225 F 225 342 57 1·2 G H D E
SST 300 F 300 417 57 1·9 Fastener finishes
Minimum cable radius = 50 mm For equal tees with G and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised or zinc
plated
For equal tees with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
Weights
galvanised G finish
following options :
43
Swifts® SS light duty fittings
4 way crosspieces
■ 4 way crosspieces dimensions and weights ■ Assembly

Cat. No. SSX W F Straight
Straightlength
tray
Z
4-way
Flatcrosspiece
bend
Width X Note

For G and
PG finish
Width A
X = Length of fitting from each end (excluding integral coupler) A M6 x 12 roofing bolt
B Roofing washer
Z = End extension of integral coupler C M6 square nut
Weight
Cat. Nos. Width X Z (kg) E Straight length
SSX 50 F 50 167 32 0·2
SSX 75 F 75 192 32 0·2 H M6 hexagon nut
SSX 100 F 100 217 32 0·4
SSX 150 F 150 267 57 0·6
SSX 225 F 225 342 57 1·3 G H D E
SSX 300 F 300 417 57 2·0 Fastener finishes

Minimum cable radius = 50 mm For crosspieces with G and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised or
zinc plated
Weights For crosspieces with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
galvanised G finish
following options :
44
straight reducers or
18
Cat. No. SSR W K F Straight
Straightlength
tray
K
Z2
Straight reducer
Flat bend
X
Note
Z1
W
For G and
PG finish
A
W
B Roofing washer
K C M6 square nut
E Straight length
H M6 hexagon nut
W = Main fitting width
K = Reduced width
X = Length of fitting from each end (excluding integral coupler) G H D E
Z1 = End extension of integral coupler Fastener finishes
Z2 = End extension of integral coupler For reducers with G and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised or zinc
plated
Dimensions (mm) For reducers with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
Width Width Weight
(W) (K) Cat. Nos. X Z1 Z2 (kg)
75 50 SSR 75 50 F 75 32 32 0·1
50 SSR 100 50 F 150 32 32 0·2
100
75 SSR 100 75 F 75 32 32 0·1
50 SSR 150 50 F 150 32 32 0·3
150 75 SSR 150 75 F 150 32 32 0·3
100 SSR 150 100 F 75 32 32 0·2
50 SSR 225 50 F 300 57 32 0·4
75 SSR 225 75 F 150 57 32 0·4
225
100 SSR 225 100 F 150 57 32 0·5
150 SSR 225 150 F 75 57 32 0·3
50 SSR 300 50 F 300 57 32 0·9
75 SSR 300 75 F 300 57 32 1·0
300 100 SSR 300 100 F 150 57 32 0·6
150 SSR 300 150 F 150 57 32 0·7
225 SSR 300 225 F 75 57 57 0·5
To create the Cat. No., add the main run width (W), to the reduced run
width (K) and the finish (F)
Example :
For a hot dip galvanised reducer reducing from 300 mm to 150 mm :
SSR 300 150 G
Weights
galvanised G finish
following options :
PG (pre-galvanised steel), S (stainless steel) All dimensions (mm) are nominal
45
Swifts® MRF medium duty return flange
straight lengths
25

Load tests carried out to BS EN 61537
The loads shown on all graphs are the safe recommended maximum
and span conditions
250
Cat. No. MRFL W F

200

see loading graphs opposite
150
Dimensions
600
Standard length 3 m
100
Plan view Plan view
A 300
25
50
25
150
25
25
20 x 8 x 2R
25
0
18 x 8 x 2R 1·0 1·5 2·0
(15 x 8 x 2R Span (m)
15·5
9·5
50 wide) Width
37·5 37·5 19
50 - 300 For lengths 450 mm wide and greater, the addition of fishplate
(typical)
Cat. No. WF F across the underside of the length-to-length joint provides
End view End added strength and increases the safe working load, see p. 101
10 6·5 view
25 t 25 t
■ Finishes and standards
Width Width G Hot dip galvanised after manufacture to BS EN ISO 1461
Side PG Pre-galvanised steel to BS EN 10346 : 2009 grade DX51D
Width A
flange (mm) (mm) Additional finishes :
detail D Deep galvanised high silicon steel made from
50 - 225 50 20·00
(typical)
BS EN 10025-5 : 2004 Grade S355JOWP
75 37·50 S Stainless steel to BS EN 10088 – 2 grade 1·4404
100 31·75 (equivalent to 316L31)
20 x 8 x 2R
150 to 900 37·50 E Powder coated (to customer’s specification)
Note
50 mm wide not available in deep galvanised (D) finish
50
R = radius Sheared steel (particularly stainless steel)

Gauges and weights
does have relatively sharp edges and protective
The gauge ‘t’ for each cable tray width and finish can vary by gloves must be worn during handling
product and range
contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
Width Weight Gauge t (mm)
Cat. Nos. (mm) (kg) G PG
MRFL 50 F 50 2·0 0·7 0·7
MRFL 75 F 75 2·6 0·7 0·7
MRFL 100 F 100 3·0 0·8 0·7
MRFL 150 F 150 3·9 0·8 0·8
MRFL 225 F 225 6·8 1·0 0·8
MRFL 300 F 300 9·2 1·2 1·0
MRFL 450 F 450 16·5 1·2 1·2
MRFL 600 F 600 21·6 1·2 1·2
MRFL 750 F 750 33·7 1·5 1·4 Key : Replace the letter shown in red with your choice from the
MRFL 900 F 900 39·7 1·5 1·4 following options :
All weights given are in kilograms (kg) and are for a 3m straight length in F = Finish : G (hot dip galvanised after manufacture),
hot dip galvanised G finish D (deep galvanised), PG (pre-galvanised steel),
To obtain the appropriate component weight in other finishes, multiply the S (stainless steel), E (powder coated)
given weight by the following factors :
Deep galvanised (D) x 1·06
Stainless steel (S) x 0·94 ➔ Coupler sets : see p. 47-48
Powder coated (E) x 0·97
46
Swifts® cable tray couplers and fasteners
MRF straight length to straight length couplers
25
■ Standard couplers ■ Assembly (continued)

Couplers are required for joining together MRF straight lengths or cut Fasteners
lengths of tray without the need for further drilling Cat. No. MRFC 50 F
MRFC standard couplers are supplied in pairs
MRFC 50 standard coupler is supplied singly For D
G, and
Supplied without fasteners – use M6 nuts, bolts and washers (see
PG E
opposite)
finish
As an alternative coupling method, use quick bolt couplers (Cat. No.
MRQBCF), which are supplied with quick bolt fasteners (Cat. No. QBF)
and a tool, see p. 48 A Coupler
■ Installation (typical)
A B C B Roofing washer
C M6 square nut
Cat. No. MRFC F D Straight length
E M6 x 12 roofing bolt
F M6 form A washer
For 50 mm wide MRF tray G M6 hexagon nut
Cat. No. MRFC 50 F For For H M6 x 12 pan head
G, D S screw
and PG finish
finish D D
E H
A B C A F G
Fastener finishes
For lengths and fittings with G, D and PG finishes fasteners are
galvanised or zinc plated. For trays and fittings with S finish, fasteners
are corrosion resistant stainless Grade A470
For lengths and fittings with E finish the choice of material for fasteners
will depend on the installation environment – contact us on
+44 (0) 845 605 4333
For 75 - 900 mm wide MRF tray
Cat. No. MRFC F Note
For quick bolt couplers and fasteners, see p. 48
■ Dimensions and weights

Illustration : SRF shown, MRF similar
Tray
Cat. Nos. range
Cat. No. MRFC 50 F Twelve
MRFC F 50(1) MRF 20 x 8 slots
MRFC F (2) MRF 170
(1) MRFC 50 for 50 mm wide tray only 1·5 Cat. No. MRFC F
(2) MRFC for 75-900 mm wide tray only
245
■ Assembly 18
For 50 mm wide MRF tray 1·2

54
Bring together two lengths and locate the coupler across the underside
of the tray joint as shown
29
Insert two roofing bolts through aligning slots in each tray bed and into Five 35 x 8
the coupler (four bolts per coupler) and secure with roofing washers slots
and nuts 39
For 75 - 900 mm wide MRF tray
Weight
Bring together two lengths and fit a coupler on the outside of adjacent Cat. Nos. (kg)
flanges at both sides of the tray joint
MRFC 50 F 0·2 single
Locate the coupler as shown and insert two roofing bolts through
aligning slots in each tray bed and coupler (four bolts per coupler), MRFC F 0·4 pair
and secure with roofing washers and nuts
Weights
galvanised G finish
Cat. No. MRFC 50 F To obtain the appropriate component weight in other finishes, multiply
Cat. No. MRFC F

following options :
47
MRF straight length to straight length couplers (continued)
and straight length to fitting coupling 25
■ Quick bolt couplers ■ Straight length to fitting coupling

Quick bolt couplers are a stronger, faster, easier and safer method of Cable tray fittings must be properly supported. The ideal location
joining together MRF straight lengths or cut lengths of tray without the for supports is shown in step 2, i.e. 150 mm from the fitting to length
need for further drilling joint. For further details see Design Notes, Recommended Support
Square-shafted quick bolts lock firmly into position before fixing. The Locations, see p. 128
nuts, which have integral washers and a serrated edge to reduce slip 1
and improve earthing, can then be easily tightened using a power tool Where necessary re-align
Supplied in packs containing 25 pairs of couplers, 100 quick bolt the fitting flange tabs from
fasteners (Cat. No. QBF) and a FREE power tool attachment their transit position to their
For tray widths 300 mm and above use two additional quick bolt fixings installation position
(Cat. No. QBF) per coupler
Quick bolt couplers are not available for 50 mm wide MRF tray
2 Uncut Cut
When a straight length of end end
cable tray has to be cut
back to accept a fitting,
■ Installation
always fit the uncut end
to the adjacent straight
Typical installation as per standard couplers, replacing nuts, bolts and length; the cut end should
washers with quick bolt fasteners, Cat. No. QBF be connected to the fitting
■ Assembly
150mm
Support
Bring together two lengths and fit a coupler on the outside of adjacent
3
flanges at both sides of the tray joint Offer the fitting at an angle
Locate the coupler and insert coach bolts through aligning slots in to the straight length and
each tray bed and coupler as shown and secure with nuts locate, ensuring that the
joggled fishplate fits under
the tray bed and the flange
tabs slide inside the length
flanges
4
Insert roofing bolts or
QBF through slots in the
tray bed in to aligning
Power tool Power tool slots in the fitting fishplate
and secure with roofing
attachment attachment washers and nuts
Tray widths up to 225 mm Tray widths 300 mm and above
Two quick bolt fasteners per Four quick bolt fasteners per
coupler coupler
Quick bolt couplers Note
Tray Weight
Cat. Nos. range (kg) Fasteners stated are for D, G and PG finishes
For lengths and fittings with S finish use fasteners listed below
MRQBC F MRF 0·4 pair
Fasteners
Fasteners
Minimum number of fasteners per joint (not included) :
Quick bolt fasteners Widths up to 225 =2
High grade steel with Dacromet finish Widths 300 to 600 = 3
Size
Cat. Nos. Pack (mm) Widths 750 and 900 = 4
QBF 100 M6 x 12 Roofing bolts
For G, D and A M6 x 12 roofing bolt
For PG finish For S finish B Roofing washer
C A Coupler
G, and A F C M6 square nut
PG D
B M6 flange nut D Fitting
finish C Straight length E Straight length
D M6 coach bolt F M6 x 12 pan head
B C D E G H D E screw
A B G M6 form A washer
H M6 hexagon nut
Quick bolt fasteners
Dimensions For C
For coupler dimensions see p. 47 G, and A Coupler
PG D B M6 flange nut
Weights finish C Straight length
All weights given are in kilograms (kg) and are for hot dip D M6 coach bolt
galvanised G finish
To obtain the appropriate component weight in other finishes, multiply A B
Pre-galvanised (PG) x 0·96 Fastener finish
For lengths and fittings with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are
All dimensions (mm) are nominal are corrosion resistant stainless Grade A470
For lengths and fittings with E finish, the choice of material for fasteners
will depend on the installation environment - contact us on
➔ Straight lengths : see p. 46 +44 (0) 845 605 4333
48
Swifts® MRF medium duty fittings
universal bracket and fishplate
■ Universal bracket ■ Universal fishplate

The universal bracket can be easily folded at one or more of the 8 Fishplates are designed for extra strength when joining cable tray beds
predetermined points. By overfolding a couple of times, the bracket and can also help to protect cables from cut edges
can be split, for example on the centre line to make a hinged coupler The universal fishplate can be overfolded and split at 75 mm centres
or in between the outer flanges if the length of the bracket needs to be when working with narrow trays
reduced Supplied singly without fasteners
The square hole is provided to locate the shoulder of the quick bolt
fastener – this side should be facing inwards towards the tray to avoid Cat. No. UF 450 F
snagging cables
The pitch between each fold point is designed to match up with the
Swifts range of MRF cable tray systems
By using different configurations the bracket can be folded to create
numerous functions on-site, examples of which are shown below
For MRF 300mm to 900 mm straight lengths, fixing holes must be drilled
into the side wall of the tray
Cat. No. MRFUB F
Side dropout Tee Bend Riser Flange assembly
■ Dimensions
A B B C
W
W
D
Above dimensions are for 90° bend Above dimensions are for 90° bend W
with overlap joint with diagonal joint. Diagonal cuts
Width Overlap Diagonal Tee
are 45°
Cat. Nos. (W) A B C D
Note 1 : Dimensions are for tee with
fishplate joint
MRFL 75 F 75 80 65 195 60 Note 2 : For overlap joint tee use
MRFL 100 F 100 105 65 220 60 ‘D’ + 50
MRFL 150 F 150 155 65 270 60
MRFL 225 F 225 230 65 345 60
MRFL 300 F 300 305 65 420 60
Illustrations : SRF shown. MRF similar
■ Handed and straight reducer configurations

Figures show approximated reduced width
Left or right handed reducers are not currently available as a standard
factory fabricated fitting
Left hand reducer Straight reducer
MRFL
Smaller Size 50 mm 75 mm 100 mm 150 mm 225 mm 300 mm 450 mm
Larger Size Handed Straight Handed Straight Handed Straight Handed Straight Handed Straight Handed Straight Handed Straight
75 mm 25 12 – – – – – – – – – – – –
100 mm 50 25 25 12 – – – – – – – – – –
150 mm 100 50 75 37 50 25 – – – – – – – –
225 mm – 87 150 75 125 62 75 37 – – – – – –
300 mm – – – 112 – 100 150 75 75 37 – – – –
450 mm – – – – – – – 150 – 112 150 75 – –
600 mm – – – – – – – – – – – 150 150 75
49
flat bends – 90°, 60°, 45° and 30°
25
Cat. No. MRFB W F Cat. No. MRFB W 45 F
90°
Y 45° Y
Z
Z
Width
Width X
X Weight
Weight MRFB 50 45 F 50 83 120 55 0·2
MRFB 75 45 F 75 108 138 55 0·4
MRFB 50 F 50 172 172 55 0·3
MRFB 100 45 F 100 133 156 55 0·5
MRFB 75 F 75 197 197 55 0·4
MRFB 150 45 F 150 183 191 55 0·8
MRFB 100 F 100 221 221 55 0·6
MRFB 225 45 F 225 258 244 55 1·2
MRFB 150 F 150 272 272 55 0·8
MRFB 300 45 F 300 333 297 55 1·1
MRFB 225 F 225 345 345 55 1·3
MRFB 450 45 F 450 483 403 55 2·3
MRFB 300 F 300 420 420 55 1·8
MRFB 600 45 F 600 633 509 55 3·5
MRFB 450 F 450 570 570 55 4·2
MRFB 750 45 F 750 783 615 55 5·1
MRFB 600 F 600 720 720 55 5·8
MRFB 900 45 F 900 933 721 55 6·8
MRFB 750 F 750 870 870 55 11·7
MRFB 900 F 900 1020 1020 55 15·8 Also consider the versatile adjustable bend for widths 50 mm - 300 mm,
see p. 52-53
Also consider the versatile adjustable bend for widths 50 mm - 300 mm, Note
see p. 52-53 50 mm wide not available in D finish
Note
50 mm wide not available in D finish
Cat. No. MRFB W 30 F
Cat. No. MRFB W 60 F
Y
30°
60°
Y
Z
Width
X
Z Weight
Width
MRFB 50 30 F 50 63 85 55 0·2
X
MRFB 75 30 F 75 88 98 55 0·2
Weight MRFB 100 30 F 100 113 110 55 0·3
MRFB 150 30 F 150 163 135 55 0·5
MRFB 50 60 F 50 108 148 55 0·3
MRFB 225 30 F 225 238 173 55 0·8
MRFB 75 60 F 75 133 169 55 0·5
MRFB 300 30 F 300 313 210 55 1·1
MRFB 100 60 F 100 158 191 55 0·6
MRFB 450 30 F 450 463 285 55 1·6
MRFB 150 60 F 150 208 234 55 0·8
MRFB 600 30 F 600 613 360 55 2·5
MRFB 225 60 F 225 283 299 55 1·3
MRFB 750 30 F 750 763 435 55 3·6
MRFB 300 60 F 300 358 364 55 1·4
MRFB 900 30 F 900 913 510 55 4·8
MRFB 450 60 F 450 509 494 55 3·0
Also consider the versatile adjustable bend for widths 50 mm - 300 mm,
MRFB 600 60 F 600 659 624 55 4·6 see p. 52-53
MRFB 750 60 F 750 809 754 55 6·6 Note
MRFB 900 60 F 900 959 884 55 9·1 50 mm wide not available in D finish
see p. 52-53 Key : Replace the letter shown in red with your choice from the
Note following options :

➔ MRF adjustable bends : see p. 52-53
50
flat bends – 90°, 60°, 45° and 30°
25
Weights
galvanised G finish
Powder coated (E) x 0·97 Minimum cable radius = 125 mm
■ Assembly – flat bends 90°, 60°, 45° and 30° Minimum bend radius for cables – flat bends 60°, 45° and 30°
Coupling detail – 90°
50
Coupling detail – 60°, 45° and 30°

Flat bend to straight length coupling

Flat bends have integral couplers which fit into straight lengths whether
they have been cut to length or not, without the need for further drilling
Each flat bend to length joint is secured with M6 x 12 bolts (roofing or
pan head), nuts and washers or quick bolt fasteners (Cat. No. QBF),
see p. 48. Fasteners are not included
Minimum number of fasteners per joint :
Widths up to 225 =2
Widths 300 to 600 =3
Widths 750 and 900 = 4
Fastener finishes
For flat bends with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised or
zinc plated. For flat bends with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
For flat bends with E finish, the choice of material for fasteners will
depend on the installation environment. For further information, contact
us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
following options :
F = Finish : G (hot dip galvanised after manufacture), All dimensions (mm) are nominal
S (stainless steel), E (powder coated) ➔ MRF adjustable bends : see p. 52-53
51
adjustable flat bends – 50 to 300 mm wide
25

Cat. No. MRFAB W F
30°
45°
60°
45°
60° 30°
Z Z Z
Width Width Width
Weight
Cat. Nos. Width Z (kg)
MRFAB 50 F 50 55 0·3
MRFAB 75 F 75 55 0·5
MRFAB 100 F 100 55 0·6
MRFAB 150 F 150 55 1·0
MRFAB 225 F 225 55 1·9
MRFAB 300 F 300 55 3·0
For widths 450-900 mm use 60°, 45° and 30° flat bends, see p. 50-51
For widths 300 mm and below use adjustable flat bends for all angles
up to 90°. Fixed angle flat bends are also available, see p. 50-51
Note
Dimensions
Weights
galvanised G finish
following options :
S (stainless steel), E (powder coated) ➔ MRF flat bends : see p. 50-51
52
25
■ Assembly ■ Assembly (continued)

Adjusting bend to any angle between 30° and 90° Fastener finishes
Adjustable flat bends can be adjusted to any angle between For adjustable flat bends with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are
30° and 90°, refer to the diagram opposite galvanised or zinc plated
For adjustable flat bends with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
Insert fasteners through both slots X in the outer sections of the bed For adjustable flat bends with E finish, the choice of material for
and the associated slots Z in the centre section of the bed. Adjust the fasteners will depend on the installation environment. For further
bendable sections equally until the required angle is formed information, contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
Setting bend to specific angles Minimum bend radius for cables
Adjustable flat bends can be set to specific fixed angles or they can be
adjusted to any angle between 30° and 90° in increments of 7·5°
Note
When setting the adjustable flat bend to the required angle, ensure that
the bendable inner flanges on the centre section engage in the return
flanges on the outer sections
Angle Fastener
(°) holes 125
30 A+A
Refer to the table and the diagram below
37·5 A+B
Insert fasteners through both slots X in the outer
45 B+B sections of the bend and the appropriate holes
52·5 B+C (A to E) in the centre section of the bed
(2 off M6 fasteners included)
60 C+C For details on how to set adjustable flat bends to angles, see below
67·5 C+D and opposite
75 D+D
82·5 D+E
90 E+E
Hinged joint
Outer section Centre section Outer section
X X
A Slots Z A
B C D E E D C B
Bendable flange Bendable flange
Coupling detail
Adjustable flat bend to straight length coupling

Adjustable flat bends have integral couplers which fit into straight
lengths whether they have been cut to length or not, without the need
for further drilling
Each adjustable flat bend to length joint is secured with M6 x 12 bolts
(roofing or pan head), nuts and washers or quick bolt fasteners
(Cat. No. QBF), see p. 48. Fasteners are not included
Widths up to 225 = 2
Width 300 =3
following options :
S (stainless steel), E (powder coated) ➔ MRF flat bends : see p. 50-51
53
inside and outside risers – 90°, 60°, 45° and 30°
25
Dimensions Weight
Cat. No. MRFIR W F Cat. No. MRFOR W F Cat. Nos. Width X Y Z (kg)
Inside riser Outside riser MRFIR 50 30 F 50 157 42 55 0·3

MRFIR 75 30 F 75 157 42 55 0·3
MRFIR 100 30 F 100 157 42 55 0·4
Z MRFIR 150 30 F 150 157 42 55 0·5
MRFIR 225 30 F 225 157 42 55 0·7
Y Y MRFIR 300 30 F 300 157 42 55 0·9
MRFIR 450 30 F 450 157 42 55 1·6
MRFIR 600 30 F 600 157 42 55 2·1
MRFIR 750 30 F 750 157 42 55 2·7
Z X MRFIR 900 30 F 900 157 42 55 3·2
X Cat. Nos. given in the table are for inside risers. For outside risers
substitute MRFIR for MRFOR. All fixed risers radius = 260 mm
Weight
Cat. Nos. Width X Y Z (kg) Dimensions
MRFIR 50 F 50 260 260 55 0·5 X = Length of fitting from each end (excluding integral coupler)
MRFIR 75 F 75 260 260 55 0·6 Y = Length of fitting from each end (excluding integral coupler)
MRFIR 100 F 100 260 260 55 0·7 Z = End extension of integral coupler
MRFIR 150 F 150 260 260 55 0·9 Weights
MRFIR 225 F 225 260 260 55 1·3 All weights given are in kilograms (kg) and are for hot dip
MRFIR 300 F 300 260 260 55 1·7 galvanised G finish
MRFIR 450 F 450 260 260 55 3·0 To obtain the appropriate component weight in other finishes, multiply
MRFIR 600 F 600 260 260 55 4·0 Deep galvanised (D) x 1·06
MRFIR 750 F 750 260 260 55 6·6 Stainless steel (S) x 0·94
MRFIR 900 F 900 260 260 55 7·9 Pre-galvanised (PG) x 0·96
■ Assembly
Coupling detail
Weight
MRFIR 50 60 F 50 269 155 55 0·4
MRFIR 75 60 F 75 269 155 55 0·5
MRFIR 100 60 F 100 269 155 55 0·5
MRFIR 150 60 F 150 269 155 55 0·7
MRFIR 225 60 F 225 269 155 55 1·0
MRFIR 300 60 F 300 269 155 55 1·3 Riser to straight length coupling
MRFIR 450 60 F 450 269 155 55 2·4 90° risers have integral couplers which fit into straight lengths whether
MRFIR 600 60 F 600 269 155 55 3·2 they have been cut to length or not, without the need for further drilling
MRFIR 750 60 F 750 269 155 55 4·0 Each riser to length joint is secured with M6 x 12 bolts (roofing or pan
head), nuts and washers or quick bolt fasteners (Cat. No. QBF),
MRFIR 900 60 F 900 269 155 55 4·8 see p. 48. Fasteners are not included
Cat. Nos. given in the table are for inside risers. For outside risers Minimum number of fasteners per joint :
substitute MRFIR for MRFOR. All fixed risers radius = 260 mm Widths up to 225 =2
Weight Fastener finishes
Cat. Nos. Width X Y Z (kg) For risers with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised or zinc
MRFIR 50 45 F 50 220 91 55 0·4 plated
MRFIR 75 45 F 75 220 91 55 0·4 For risers with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
For risers with E finish, the choice of material for fasteners will depend
MRFIR 100 45 F 100 220 91 55 0·5 on the installation environment. For further information, contact us on
MRFIR 150 45 F 150 220 91 55 0·6 +44 (0) 845 605 4333
MRFIR 225 45 F 225 220 91 55 0·8
MRFIR 300 45 F 300 220 91 55 1·1
MRFIR 450 45 F 450 220 91 55 2·0
MRFIR 600 45 F 600 220 91 55 2·7
MRFIR 750 45 F 750 220 91 55 3·3
MRFIR 900 45 F 900 220 91 55 4·0
following options :
S (stainless steel), E (powder coated) ➔ MRF adjustable risers : see p. 55
54
adjustable risers
25

The adjustable riser can be used as an inside or outside riser for any As many riser segments as necessary may be inserted into the end of
Dimensions
Cat. No. MRFAR W F
Used
Used as
as Used as
Used as
inside
insideriser
riser outside riser
outside riser
30°
Coupling detail
45°
90°
60°
60°
90°
45° Adjustable riser to straight length coupling

Adjustable risers fit into straight lengths whether they have been cut to
lengths or not, without the need for further drilling
30° Each riser to length joint is secured with M6 x 12 bolts (roofing or pan
Widths up to 225 =2
90° Widths 300 to 600 =3
Fastener finishes
For adjustable riser with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised
or zinc plated
For adjustable riser with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
90° For adjustable riser with E finish, the choice of material for fasteners will
us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
Weight
MRFAR 50 F 50 0·4
MRFAR 75 F 75 0·5
MRFAR 100 F 100 0·6
MRFAR 150 F 150 0·9
MRFAR 225 F 225 1·2
MRFAR 300 F 300 2·0
MRFAR 450 F 450 3·0
MRFAR 600 F 600 4·1
MRFAR 750 F 750 5·2
MRFAR 900 F 900 6·2
Note
Weights
galvanised G finish
following options :
S (stainless steel), E (powder coated) ➔ MRF inside and outside risers : see p. 54
55
extra long adjustable risers
25

The extra long adjustable riser can be used as an inside or outside As many riser segments as necessary may be inserted into the end of
riser for any angle up to 90° the straight length, thus avoiding the need for cutting
Overall length when flat = 1 087 mm
Dimensions
Cat. No. MRFAXR W F
Used asinside
Used as inside riser
riser
for
for any angleupup
any angle to to
90°90°
Coupling detail
Used asoutside
Used as outside riser
riser
for
for any angleupup
any angle to to
90°90°
Extra long adjustable riser to straight length coupling

Used
Used to avoidobstacles
to avoid obstacleson on
sitesite Extra long adjustable risers fit into straight lengths whether they have
been cut to length or not, without the need for further drilling
Each riser to length joint is secured with M6 x 12 bolts (roofing or pan
90° Widths up to 225 =2
Fastener finishes
For adjustable risers with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are
galvanised or zinc plated
90° For adjustable risers with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
For adjustable risers with E finish, the choice of material for fasteners
will depend on the installation environment. For further information,
Weight contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
MRFAXR 50 F 50 0·7
MRFAXR 75 F 75 1·0
MRFAXR 100 F 100 1·2
MRFAXR 150 F 150 1·7
MRFAXR 225 F 225 2·5
MRFAXR 300 F 300 4·2
MRFAXR 450 F 450 6·2
MRFAXR 600 F 600 8·2
MRFAXR 750 F 750 10·3
MRFAXR 900 F 900 12·4
Note
Weights
galvanised G finish
following options :
S (stainless steel), E (powder coated) ➔ MRF inside and outside risers : see p. 54
56
equal tees
25

Cat. No. MRFT W F
Y Width
Equal tee to straight length coupling

Equal tees have integral couplers which fit into straight lengths whether
Z
Each equal tee to length joint is secured with M6 x 12 bolts (roofing or
Width
X
Widths up to 225 =2
X = Length of fitting from each end (excluding integral coupler) Widths 300 to 600 =3
Y = Length of fitting from each end (excluding integral coupler) Widths 750 and 900 = 4
Z = End extension of integral coupler Fastener finishes
For equal tees with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised or
zinc plated
Weight
Cat. Nos. Width X Y Z (kg) For equal tees with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
For equal tees with E finish, the choice of material for fasteners will
MRFT 50 F 50 172 295 55 0·6 depend on the installation environment. For further information, contact
MRFT 75 F 75 197 320 55 0·8 us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
MRFT 100 F 100 221 344 55 0·9 Minimum bend radius for cables
MRFT 150 F 150 271 394 55 1·3
MRFT 225 F 225 346 469 55 2·0
MRFT 300 F 300 420 542 55 2·8
MRFT 450 F 450 570 692 55 5·7
MRFT 600 F 600 720 842 55 9·0
MRFT 750 F 750 870 992 55 16·4
MRFT 900 F 900 1 020 1 142 55 21·9
Note 125
Weights
All weights given are in kilograms (kg) and are for hot dip Minimum cable radius = 125 mm
galvanised G finish
following options :
S (stainless steel), E (powder coated) ➔ MRF unequal tees : see p. 58
57
unequal tees
25
■ Dimensions and weights Dimensions (mm)

Width Width Weight
Dimensions (W) (B) Cat. Nos. X Y Z1 Z2 (kg)
Cat. No. MRFUT W B F
50 MRFUT 225 50 F 346 294 55 55 1·3
75 MRFUT 225 75 F 346 320 55 55 1·4
100 MRFUT 225 100 F 346 344 55 55 1·5
150 MRFUT 225 150 F 346 394 55 55 1·7
225 300 MRFUT 225 300 F 346 542 55 55 2·3
Y B
450 MRFUT 225 450 F 346 692 55 55 3·7
600 MRFUT 225 600 F 346 842 55 55 4·5
Z2 750 MRFUT 225 750 F 346 992 55 55 5·2
Z1 900 MRFUT 225 900 F 346 1 142 55 55 6·0
50 MRFUT 300 50 F 420 294 55 55 1·6
W
75 MRFUT 300 75 F 420 320 55 55 1·7
X
100 MRFUT 300 100 F 420 342 55 55 1·8
X = Length of fitting from each end (excluding integral coupler) 150 MRFUT 300 150 F 420 392 55 55 2·0
Y = Length of fitting from each end (excluding integral coupler) 300 225 MRFUT 300 225 F 420 467 55 55 2·4
Z1 = End extension of integral coupler
450 MRFUT 300 450 F 420 692 55 55 4·5
600 MRFUT 300 600 F 420 842 55 55 5·4
Note
750 MRFUT 300 750 F 420 992 55 55 6·1
900 MRFUT 300 900 F 420 1 142 55 55 7·1
50 MRFUT 450 50 F 570 294 55 55 2·7
75 MRFUT 450 75 F 570 320 55 55 2·9
100 MRFUT 450 100 F 570 342 55 55 3·1
150 MRFUT 450 150 F 570 392 55 55 3·5
Dimensions (mm)
Width Width Weight 450 225 MRFUT 450 225 F 570 467 55 55 4·1
(W) (B) Cat. Nos. X Y Z1 Z2 (kg)
300 MRFUT 450 300 F 570 542 55 55 4·7
75 MRFUT 50 75 F 172 320 55 55 0·7
600 MRFUT 450 600 F 570 842 55 55 7·2
100 MRFUT 50 100 F 172 344 55 55 0·7
750 MRFUT 450 750 F 570 992 55 55 10·1
150 MRFUT 50 150 F 172 394 55 55 0·8
900 MRFUT 450 900 F 570 1 142 55 55 12·6
225 MRFUT 50 225 F 172 469 55 55 1·0
50 MRFUT 600 50 F 720 294 55 55 3·3
50 300 MRFUT 50 300 F 172 542 55 55 1·2
75 MRFUT 600 75 F 720 320 55 55 3·7
450 MRFUT 50 450 F 172 692 55 55 2·0
100 MRFUT 600 100 F 720 342 55 55 3·9
600 MRFUT 50 600 F 172 842 55 55 2·4
150 MRFUT 600 150 F 720 392 55 55 4·4
750 MRFUT 50 750 F 172 992 55 55 2·9
600 225 MRFUT 600 225 F 720 467 55 55 5·2
900 MRFUT 50 900 F 172 1 142 55 55 3·4
300 MRFUT 600 300 F 720 542 55 55 6·0
50 MRFUT 75 50 F 197 294 55 55 0·7
450 MRFUT 600 450 F 720 692 55 55 7·5
100 MRFUT 75 100 F 197 344 55 55 0·8
750 MRFUT 600 750 F 720 992 55 55 10·0
150 MRFUT 75 150 F 197 394 55 55 1·0
900 MRFUT 600 900 F 720 1 142 55 55 15·6
225 MRFUT 75 225 F 197 469 55 55 1·2
50 MRFUT 750 50 F 870 294 55 55 4·2
75 300 MRFUT 75 300 F 197 542 55 55 1·4
75 MRFUT 750 75 F 870 320 55 55 4·4
450 MRFUT 75 450 F 197 692 55 55 2·2
100 MRFUT 750 100 F 870 342 55 55 4·7
600 MRFUT 75 600 F 197 842 55 55 2·7
150 MRFUT 750 150 F 870 392 55 55 6·7
750 MRFUT 75 750 F 197 992 55 55 3·3
750 225 MRFUT 750 225 F 870 467 55 55 8·1
900 MRFUT 75 900 F 197 1 142 55 55 3·7
300 MRFUT 750 300 F 870 542 55 55 9·3
50 MRFUT 100 50 F 221 294 55 55 0·8
450 MRFUT 750 450 F 870 692 55 55 11·3
75 MRFUT 100 75 F 221 320 55 55 0·9
600 MRFUT 750 600 F 870 842 55 55 12·2
150 MRFUT 100 150 F 221 394 55 55 1·1
900 MRFUT 750 900 F 870 1 142 55 55 13·8
225 MRFUT 100 225 F 221 469 55 55 1·3
50 MRFUT 900 50 F 1 020 294 55 55 4·9
100 300 MRFUT 100 300 F 221 542 55 55 1·5
75 MRFUT 900 75 F 1 020 320 55 55 5·1
450 MRFUT 100 450 F 221 692 55 55 2·4
100 MRFUT 900 100 F 1 020 342 55 55 5·5
600 MRFUT 100 600 F 221 842 55 55 3·0
150 MRFUT 900 150 F 1 020 392 55 55 6·2
750 MRFUT 100 750 F 221 992 55 55 3·7
900 225 MRFUT 900 225 F 1 020 467 55 55 7·2
900 MRFUT 100 900 F 221 1 142 55 55 4·1
300 MRFUT 900 300 F 1 020 542 55 55 11·6
50 MRFUT 150 50 F 271 294 55 55 1·0
450 MRFUT 900 450 F 1 020 692 55 55 13·6
75 MRFUT 150 75 F 271 320 55 55 1·1
600 MRFUT 900 600 F 1 020 842 55 55 16·0
100 MRFUT 150 100 F 271 344 55 55 1·1
750 MRFUT 900 750 F 1 020 992 55 55 17·0
225 MRFUT 150 225 F 271 469 55 55 1·6
150 300 MRFUT 150 300 F 271 542 55 55 1·8 Key : Replace the letter shown in red with your choice from the
450 MRFUT 150 450 F 271 692 55 55 2·9 following options :
600 MRFUT 150 600 F 271 842 55 55 3·5 F = Finish : G (hot dip galvanised after manufacture),
750 MRFUT 150 750 F 271 992 55 55 3·8 D (deep galvanised), PG (pre-galvanised steel),
900 MRFUT 150 900 F 271 1 142 55 55 4·1 S (stainless steel), E (powder coated)
58
unequal tees
25
■ Dimensions and weights (continued)

Weights
galvanised G finish
■ Assembly
Coupling detail
Unequal tee to straight length coupling

Unequal tees have integral couplers which fit into straight lengths
whether they have been cut to length or not, without the need for
further drilling
Each unequal tee to length joint is secured with M6 x 12 bolts (roofing
or pan head), nuts and washers or quick bolt fasteners (Cat. No. QBF),
Widths up to 225 =2
Fastener finishes
For unequal tees with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised
or zinc plated
For unequal tees with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
For unequal tees with E finish, the choice of material for fasteners will
us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
Minimum bend radius for cables
125
➔ MRF equal tees : see p. 57
59
4 way crosspieces
25

Cat. No. MRFX W F
Z
Width X
4 way crosspiece to straight length coupling

Crosspieces have integral couplers which fit into straight lengths
further drilling
Each crosspiece to length joint is secured with M6 x 12 bolts (roofing
Width or pan head), nuts and washers or quick bolt fasteners (Cat. No. QBF),
X see p. 48. Fasteners are not included
X = Length of fitting from each end (excluding integral coupler) Widths up to 225 =2
Y = Length of fitting from each end (excluding integral coupler) Widths 300 to 600 =3
Z = End extension of integral coupler Widths 750 and 900 = 4
Fastener finishes
Weight For crosspieces with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised or
Cat. Nos. Width X Z (kg)
zinc plated
MRFX 50 F 50 295 55 0·8 For crosspieces with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
MRFX 75 F 75 320 55 1·0 For crosspieces with E finish, the choice of material for fasteners will
MRFX 100 F 100 344 55 1·2 us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
MRFX 150 F 150 394 55 1·7
MRFX 225 F 225 469 55 2·4
MRFX 300 F 300 542 55 3·3
MRFX 450 F 450 692 55 6·9
MRFX 600 F 600 842 55 10·2
MRFX 750 F 750 992 55 18·4
MRFX 900 F 900 1 142 55 23·5
Note
Weights 125
galvanised G finish
the given weight by the following factors : Minimum cable radius = 125 mm
following options :
60
straight reducers
25

Dimensions
Cat. No. MRFR W K F
W
K X = Length of fitting from
each end (excluding
integral coupler) K
Z2 Z1 = End extension of
integral coupler
X Z2 = End extension of
integral coupler To create the Cat No., add the main run width (W), the reduced run
Z1
K = Reduced width width (K) and the finish (F)
Example :
Width For a hot dip galvanised reducer reducing from 300 mm to 150 mm :
MRFR 300 150 G
Weights
galvanised G finish
Dimensions (mm) To obtain the appropriate component weight in other finishes, multiply
Width Weight the given weight by the following factors :
Width (K) Cat. Nos. X Z1 Z2 (kg)
75 50 MRFR 75 50 F 100 55 55 0·2 Stainless steel (S) x 0·94
50 MRFR 100 50 F 100 55 55 0·2 Pre-galvanised (PG) x 0·96
100 Powder coated (E) x 0·97
75 MRFR 100 75 F 100 55 55 0·2
50 MRFR 150 50 F 100 55 55 0·3 ■ Assembly
150 75 MRFR 150 75 F 100 55 55 0·3 Coupling detail
100 MRFR 150 100 F 100 55 55 0·3
50 MRFR 225 50 F 150 55 55 0·5
75 MRFR 225 75 F 100 55 55 0·4
225
100 MRFR 225 100 F 100 55 55 0·4
150 MRFR 225 150 F 100 55 55 0·4
50 MRFR 300 50 F 150 55 55 0·5
75 MRFR 300 75 F 150 55 55 0·6
300 100 MRFR 300 100 F 100 55 55 0·5 Reducer to straight length coupling
150 MRFR 300 150 F 100 55 55 0·5 Reducers have integral couplers which fit into straight lengths whether
225 MRFR 300 225 F 100 55 55 0·6 they have been cut to length or not, without the need for further drilling
Each reducer to length joint is secured with M6 x 12 bolts (roofing or
50 MRFR 450 50 F 300 55 55 1·2 pan head), nuts and washers or quick bolt fasteners (Cat. No. QBF),
75 MRFR 450 75 F 300 55 55 1·2 see p. 48. Fasteners are not included
100 MRFR 450 100 F 300 55 55 1·3 Minimum number of fasteners per joint :
450 Widths up to 225 =2
150 MRFR 450 150 F 150 55 55 0·9
225 MRFR 450 225 F 150 55 55 0·9 Widths 750 and 900 = 4
300 MRFR 450 300 F 100 55 55 0·8 Fastener finishes
50 MRFR 600 50 F 300 55 55 1·9 For reducers with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised or
zinc plated
75 MRFR 600 75 F 300 55 55 1·6 For reducers with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
100 MRFR 600 100 F 300 55 55 1·6 For reducers with E finish, the choice of material for fasteners will
600 150 MRFR 600 150 F 300 55 55 1·7 depend on the installation environment. For further information, contact
us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
225 MRFR 600 225 F 300 55 55 1·8
300 MRFR 600 300 F 150 55 55 1·2
450 MRFR 600 450 F 100 55 55 1·3
50 MRFR 750 50 F 450 55 55 2·6
75 MRFR 750 75 F 450 55 55 2·6
100 MRFR 750 100 F 450 55 55 2·7
150 MRFR 750 150 F 300 55 55 2·7
750
225 MRFR 750 225 F 300 55 55 2·8
300 MRFR 750 300 F 300 55 55 2·8
450 MRFR 750 450 F 150 55 55 3·9
600 MRFR 750 600 F 100 55 55 4·0
50 MRFR 900 50 F 450 55 55 3·6
75 MRFR 900 75 F 450 55 55 3·9
100 MRFR 900 100 F 450 55 55 3·9
150 MRFR 900 150 F 450 55 55 4·0 All dimensions (mm) are nominal
900 225 MRFR 900 225 F 450 55 55 4·2 Key : Replace the letter shown in red with your choice from the
300 MRFR 900 300 F 300 55 55 5·2 following options :
450 MRFR 900 450 F 300 55 55 5·5 F = Finish : G (hot dip galvanised after manufacture),
600 MRFR 900 600 F 300 55 55 5·9 D (deep galvanised), PG (pre-galvanised steel),
750 MRFR 900 750 F 100 55 55 6·2 S (stainless steel), E (powder coated)
61
Swifts® SRF heavy duty return flange
straight lengths
50

and span conditions
Cat. No. SRFL W F 250
For cable load capacity 200

Dimensions 600(1)
150
Standard length 3 m
Plan view Plan view
A 300
100
25
25
150
25
50
25
20 x 8 x 2R
25
18 x 8 x 2R
15·5
0
9·5
Width
37·5 37·5 19 1·5 2·0 2·5
75 - 300
(typical) Span (m)
(1) SRFL 600 – tested with fishplates
End view 8
End For lengths 450 mm wide and greater, the addition of fishplate
10 view Cat. No. WF F across the underside of the length-to-length joint provides
added strength and increases the safe working load, see p. 101
49·5 49·5
t t
G Hot dip galvanised after manufacture to BS EN ISO 1461
Width Width PG Pre-galvanised steel to BS EN 10346 : 2009 grade DX51D
Width A
Additional finishes :
(mm) (mm) D Deep galvanised high silicon steel made from
75 37·50 BS EN 10025-5 : 2004 Grade S355JOWP
S Stainless steel to BS EN 10088 – 2 grade 1·4404
Side flange 100 31·75 (equivalent to 316L31)
detail 150 to 900 37·50 E Powder coated (to customer’s specification)
R = radius
Gauges and weights Sheared steel (particularly stainless steel)
The gauge ‘t’ for each cable tray width and finish can vary by does have relatively sharp edges and protective
product and range gloves must be worn during handling
contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333

Cat. Nos. (mm) (kg) G PG
SRFL 75 F 75 4·2 0·9 0·9
SRFL 100 F 100 4·4 0·9 0·9
SRFL 150 F 150 6·0 0·9 0·9
SRFL 225 F 225 8·9 1·2 1·2
SRFL 300 F 300 10·8 1·2 1·2
SRFL 450 F 450 17·8 1·2 1·2
SRFL 600 F 600 22·9 1·5 1·4
SRFL 750 F 750 35·9 2·0 2·0
SRFL 900 F 900 42·0 2·0 2·0
All weights given are in kilograms (kg) and are for a 3m straight length in Key : Replace the letter shown in red with your choice from the
hot dip galvanised G finish following options :
To obtain the appropriate component weight in other finishes, multiply the
Stainless steel (S) x 0·94 S (stainless steel), E (powder coated)
Powder coated (E) x 0·97 ➔ Coupler sets : see p. 63-64
62
SRF straight length to straight length couplers
50
■ Standard couplers ■ Assembly (continued)

Couplers are required for joining together SRF straight lengths or cut Fasteners
lengths of tray without the need for further drilling
SRFC standard couplers are supplied in pairs
Supplied without fasteners – use M6 nuts, bolts and washers (see For For A Coupler
opposite) G, D S B Roofing washer
As an alternative coupling method, use quick bolt couplers (Cat. No. and PG finish C M6 square nut
SRQBCF), which are supplied with quick bolt fasteners (Cat. No. QBF) finish D D D Straight length
and a tool, see p. 48 H E M6 x 12 roofing bolt
E
F M6 form A washer
■ Installation (typical) G M6 hexagon nut
H M6 x 12 pan head
screw
A B C A F G
Fastener finishes
For lengths and fittings with G, D and PG finishes fasteners are
are corrosion resistant stainless Grade A470
For lengths and fittings with E finish the choice of material for fasteners
will depend on the installation environment – contact us on
+44 (0) 845 605 4333
Note
For quick bolt couplers and fasteners, see p. 48

Heavy duty
Cat. No. SRFC F
Tray Cat. No. SRFC F
Cat. No. range
SRFC F SRF 245
■ Assembly
1·5
Locate the coupler as shown and insert two roofing bolts through 54
aligning slots in each tray bed and coupler (four bolts per Five 35 x 8
coupler), and secure with roofing washers and nuts slots
39
Weight
Cat. Nos. (kg)
SRFC F 0·7 pair
Weights
galvanised G finish
Cat. Nos. SRFC F Powder coated (E) x 0·97
following options :
63
SRF straight length to straight length couplers (continued)
■ Quick bolt couplers ■ Straight length to fitting coupling

Quick bolt couplers are a stronger, faster, easier and safer method of Cable tray fittings must be properly supported. The ideal location
joining together SRF straight lengths or cut lengths of tray without the for supports is shown in step 2, i.e. 150 mm from the fitting to length
need for further drilling joint. For further details see Design Notes, Recommended Support
Square-shafted quick bolts lock firmly into position before fixing. The Locations, see p. 128
nuts, which have integral washers and a serrated edge to reduce slip 1
and improve earthing, can then be easily tightened using a power tool Where necessary re-align
Supplied in packs containing 25 pairs of couplers, 100 quick bolt the fitting flange tabs from
fasteners (Cat. No. QBF) and a FREE power tool attachment their transit position to their
For tray widths 300 mm and above use two additional quick bolt fixings installation position
(Cat. No. QBF) per coupler
2 Uncut Cut
■ Installation
Typical installation as per standard couplers, replacing nuts, bolts and length; the cut end should
washers with quick bolt fasteners, Cat. No. QBF be connected to the fitting
■ Assembly
150mm
Support
3
flanges at both sides of the tray joint Offer the fitting at an angle
Locate the coupler and insert coach bolts through aligning slots in to the straight length and
each tray bed and coupler as shown and secure with nuts locate, ensuring that the
flanges
4
Insert roofing bolts or
QBF through slots in the
tray bed in to aligning
Power tool Power tool slots in the fitting fishplate
and secure with roofing
attachment attachment washers and nuts
Tray widths up to 225 mm Tray widths 300 mm and above For extra rigidity on SRF
fittings, bolts can be fitted
Two quick bolt fasteners per Four quick bolt fasteners per through the sides of the
coupler coupler lengths and the fitting tabs
Illustration : MRF shown, SRF similar Note
Quick bolt couplers Fasteners stated are for D, G and PG finishes
Tray Weight For lengths and fittings with S finish use fasteners listed below
Cat. Nos. range (kg)
SRQBC F SRF 0·7 pair Fasteners
Fasteners Widths up to 225 =2
Quick bolt fasteners Widths 300 to 600 = 3
High grade steel with Dacromet finish Widths 750 and 900 = 4
Size
Cat. Nos. Pack (mm) Roofing bolts
QBF 100 M6 x 12 For G, D and A M6 x 12 roofing bolt
PG finish For S finish B Roofing washer
For A F C M6 square nut
C A Coupler D Fitting
G, and
PG B M6 flange nut E Straight length
D
finish C Straight length F M6 x 12 pan head
D M6 coach bolt B C D E G H D E screw
G M6 form A washer
H M6 hexagon nut
A B Quick bolt fasteners
■ Dimensions and weights For C

Dimensions G, and A Coupler
For coupler dimensions see p. 63 PG D B M6 flange nut
finish C Straight length
Weights D M6 coach bolt
galvanised G finish A B
the given weight by the following factors : Fastener finish
Pre-galvanised (PG) x 0·96 For lengths and fittings with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are
All dimensions (mm) are nominal are corrosion resistant stainless Grade A470
For lengths and fittings with E finish, the choice of material for fasteners
will depend on the installation environment - contact us on
➔ Straight lengths : see p. 46 +44 (0) 845 605 4333
64
Swifts® SRF heavy duty fittings
universal bracket and fishplate
■ Universal bracket ■ Universal fishplate

The universal bracket can be easily folded at one or more of the 9 Fishplates are designed for extra strength when joining cable tray beds
predetermined points. By overfolding a couple of times, the bracket and can also help to protect cables from cut edges
can be split, for example on the centre line to make a hinged coupler The universal fishplate can be overfolded and split at 75 mm centres
or in between the outer flanges if the length of the bracket needs to be when working with narrow trays
reduced Supplied singly without fasteners
The square hole is provided to locate the shoulder of the quick bolt
fastener – this side should be facing inwards towards the tray to avoid Cat. No. UF 450 F
snagging cables
The pitch between each fold point is designed to match up with the
Swifts range of SRF cable tray systems
By using different configurations the bracket can be folded to create
numerous functions on-site, examples of which are shown below
Cat. No. SRFUB F
Side dropout Tee Bend Riser Flange assembly
■ Dimensions
A B B C
W
W
D
Above dimensions are for 90° bend Above dimensions are for 90° bend W
with overlap joint with diagonal joint. Diagonal cuts
are 45°
Width Overlap Diagonal Tee Note 1 : Dimensions are for tee with
Cat. Nos. (W) A B C D
fishplate joint
SRFL 75 F 75 80 85 220 75 Note 2 : For overlap joint tee use
SRFL 100 F 100 105 85 245 75 ‘D’ + 50
SRFL 150 F 150 155 85 295 75
SRFL 225 F 225 230 85 370 75
SRFL 300 F 300 305 85 445 75
■ Handed and straight reducer configurations
Figures show approximated reduced width
Left or right handed reducers are not currently available as a standard
factory fabricated fitting
SRFL
Smaller Size 75 mm 100 mm 150 mm 225 mm 300 mm 450 mm 600 mm 750 mm
Larger Size Handed Straight Handed Straight Handed Straight Handed Straight Handed Straight Handed Straight Handed Straight Handed Straight
100 mm 25 12 – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
150 mm 75 37 50 25 – – – – – – – – – – – –
225 mm 150 75 125 62 75 37 – – – – – – – – – –
300 mm – 112 200 100 150 75 75 37 – – – – – – – –
450 mm – – – 175 – 150 – 112 150 75 – – – – – –
600 mm – – – – – – – 187 – 150 150 75 – – – –
750 mm – – – – – – – – – – – 150 150 75 – –
900 mm – – – – – – – – – – – – – 150 150 75
65
flat bends – 90°, 60°, 45° and 30°
50
Cat. No. SRFB W F Cat. No. SRFB W 45 F
90°
Y 45°
Y
Z
Z
Width
Width X
X Weight
Weight SRFB 75 45 F 75 108 138 55 0·4
SRFB 100 45 F 100 133 156 55 0·4
SRFB 75 F 75 197 197 55 0·6
SRFB 150 45 F 150 183 191 55 0·6
SRFB 100 F 100 221 221 55 0·8
SRFB 225 45 F 225 258 244 55 0·9
SRFB 150 F 150 272 272 55 1·0
SRFB 300 45 F 300 333 297 55 1·5
SRFB 225 F 225 345 345 55 1·5
SRFB 450 45 F 450 482 402 55 2·5
SRFB 300 F 300 420 420 55 2·6
SRFB 600 45 F 600 632 508 55 3·9
SRFB 450 F 450 568 568 55 4·3
SRFB 750 45 F 750 782 614 55 7·0
SRFB 600 F 600 718 718 55 6·4
SRFB 900 45 F 900 932 720 55 9·4
SRFB 750 F 750 860 860 55 12·4
SRFB 900 F 900 1 018 1 018 55 16·6 Also consider the versatile adjustable bend for widths 75 mm - 300 mm,
see p. 68-69
see p. 68-69
Cat. No. SRFB W 30 F
Cat. No. SRFB W 60 F
Y
30°
60°
Y Z
Width
X
Z Weight
Width SRFB 75 30 F 75 88 98 55 0·3
X SRFB 100 30 F 100 113 110 55 0·3
SRFB 150 30 F 150 163 135 55 0·4
Weight
Cat. Nos. Width X Y Z (kg) SRFB 225 30 F 225 238 173 55 0·6
SRFB 75 60 F 75 133 169 55 0·6 SRFB 300 30 F 300 313 210 55 1·1
SRFB 100 60 F 100 158 191 55 0·6 SRFB 450 30 F 450 463 285 55 1·8
SRFB 150 60 F 150 208 234 55 0·8 SRFB 600 30 F 600 613 360 55 2·7
SRFB 225 60 F 225 283 299 55 1·2 SRFB 750 30 F 750 763 435 55 5·0
SRFB 300 60 F 300 358 364 55 2·0 SRFB 900 30 F 900 913 510 55 6·6
SRFB 450 60 F 450 508 493 55 3·4 Also consider the versatile adjustable bend for widths 75 mm - 300 mm,
SRFB 600 60 F 600 658 623 55 5·2 see p. 68-69
SRFB 750 60 F 750 808 753 55 9·4
SRFB 900 60 F 900 958 882 55 12·5
see p. 68-69
following options :
S (stainless steel), E (powder coated) ➔ SRF adjustable bends : see p. 68-69
66
flat bends – 90°, 60°, 45° and 30° (continued)
50
Weights
galvanised G finish
Minimum bend radius for cables – flat bends 60°, 45° and 30°
Coupling detail – 90°
125
Coupling detail – 60°, 45° and 30°

pan head), nuts and washers or quick bolt fasteners (Cat. No. QBF)
Widths up to 225 =2
Fastener finishes
For flat bends with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised or
zinc plated. For flat bends with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
For flat bends with E finish, the choice of material for fasteners will
us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
following options :
S (stainless steel), E (powder coated) ➔ SRF adjustable bends : see p. 68-69
67
50

Cat. No. SRFAB W F
30°
45°
60°
45°
60° 30°
Z Z Z
Width Width Width
Weight
Cat. Nos. Width Z (kg)
SRFAB 75 F 75 55 0·6
SRFAB 100 F 100 55 0·8
SRFAB 150 F 150 55 1·2
SRFAB 225 F 225 55 2·1
SRFAB 300 F 300 55 4·1
For widths 450-900 mm use 60°, 45° and 30° flat bends, see p. 66-67
For widths 300 mm and below use adjustable flat bends for all angles
up to 90°. Fixed angled flat bends are also available, see p. 66-67
Dimensions
Weights
galvanised G finish
following options :
S (stainless steel), E (powder coated) ➔ SRF flat bends : see p. 66-67
68
adjustable flat bends – 75 to 300 mm wide (continued)
50
■ Assembly ■ Assembly (continued)

Adjusting bend to any angle between 30° and 90° Minimum bend radius for cables
Adjustable flat bends can be adjusted to any angle between
30° and 90°, refer to the diagram opposite
Insert fasteners through both slots X in the outer sections of the bed
and the associated slots Z in the centre section of the bed. Adjust the
bendable sections equally until the required angle is formed
Fasteners can also be inserted through the inner flanges when the slots
in the fixed outer section flange and the bendable centre section flange
align
125
Setting bend to specific angles
Adjustable flat bends can be set to specific fixed angles or they can be
adjusted to any angle between 30° and 90° in increments of 7·5°
Note
When setting the adjustable flat bend to the required angle, ensure that
the bendable inner flanges on the centre section engage in the return
flanges on the outer sections For details on how to set adjustable flat bends to angles, see opposite
Angle Fastener
(°) holes
Refer to the table and the diagram below
30 A+A
Insert fastenings through both slots X in the
37·5 A+B outer sections of the bend and the appropriate
45 B+B holes (A to E) in the centre section of the bed
(2 off M6 fastenings included)
52·5 B+C
Fasteners can also be inserted through the
60 C+C inner flanges when the slots in the fixed outer
67·5 C+D section flange and the bendable centre section
flange align
75 D+D
82·5 D+E
90 E+E
Hinged joint
Outer section Centre section Outer section
X X
A Slots Z A
B C D E E D C B
Bendable flange Bendable flange
Coupling detail
Adjustable flat bend to straight length coupling

Width 300 =3
Fastener finishes
For adjustable flat bends with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are
galvanised or zinc plated All dimensions (mm) are nominal
For adjustable flat bends with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
For adjustable flat bends with E finish, the choice of material for Key : Replace the letter shown in red with your choice from the
fasteners will depend on the installation environment. For further following options :
information, contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333 F = Finish : G (hot dip galvanised after manufacture),
➔ SRF flat bends : see p. 66-67
69
50
Dimensions Weight
Inside riser Outside riser SRFIR 75 30 F 75 157 42 55 0·4
Cat. No. SRFIR W F Cat. No. SRFOR W F
SRFIR 100 30 F 100 157 42 55 0·4
SRFIR 150 30 F 150 157 42 55 0·6
Z SRFIR 225 30 F 225 157 42 55 0·7
SRFIR 300 30 F 300 157 42 55 0·7
X
Y SRFIR 450 30 F 450 157 42 55 1·6
SRFIR 600 30 F 600 157 42 55 2·2
SRFIR 750 30 F 750 157 42 55 2·9
SRFIR 900 30 F 900 157 42 55 4·2
Z Y
X
substitute SRFIR for SRFOR. All fixed risers radius = 260 mm
Weight Dimensions
SRFIR 75 F 75 260 260 55 0·8 Y = Length of fitting from each end (excluding integral coupler)
SRFIR 100 F 100 260 260 55 0·9 Z = End extension of integral coupler
SRFIR 150 F 150 260 260 55 1·2 Weights
SRFIR 225 F 225 260 260 55 1·5 All weights given are in kilograms (kg) and are for hot dip
SRFIR 300 F 300 260 260 55 2·4 galvanised G finish
SRFIR 450 F 450 260 260 55 3·4 To obtain the appropriate component weight in other finishes, multiply
SRFIR 600 F 600 260 260 55 4·1
SRFIR 750 F 750 260 260 55 6·9 Stainless steel (S) x 0·94
SRFIR 900 F 900 260 260 55 8·2 Pre-galvanised (PG) x 0·96
substitute SRFIR for SRFOR. All fixed risers radius = 260 mm ■ Assembly
■ 60° inside and outside risers – dimensions and weights Coupling detail
Weight
SRFIR 75 60 F 75 269 155 55 0·7
SRFIR 100 60 F 100 269 155 55 0·8
SRFIR 150 60 F 150 269 155 55 0·9
SRFIR 225 60 F 225 269 155 55 1·3
SRFIR 300 60 F 300 269 155 55 1·9
SRFIR 450 60 F 450 269 155 55 2·5
SRFIR 600 60 F 600 269 155 55 3·2
SRFIR 750 60 F 750 269 155 55 3·7 90° riser to straight length coupling
SRFIR 900 60 F 900 269 155 55 5·8 90° risers have integral couplers which fit into straight lengths whether
Cat. Nos. given in the table are for inside risers. For outside risers Each riser to length joint is secured with M6 x 12 bolts (roofing or pan
substitute SRFIR for SRFOR. All fixed risers radius = 260 mm head), nuts and washers or quick bolt fasteners (Cat. No. QBF),
■ 45° inside and outside risers – dimensions and weights see p. 64. Fasteners are not included
Weight
Cat. Nos. Width X Y Z (kg) Widths up to 225 =2
SRFIR 75 45 F 75 220 91 55 0·5
SRFIR 100 45 F 100 220 91 55 0·6 Fastener finishes
SRFIR 150 45 F 150 220 91 55 0·8 For risers with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised or zinc
SRFIR 225 45 F 225 220 91 55 1·0 plated
For risers with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
SRFIR 300 45 F 300 220 91 55 1·6 For risers with E finish, the choice of material for fasteners will depend
SRFIR 450 45 F 450 220 91 55 2·2 on the installation environment. For further information, contact us on
SRFIR 600 45 F 600 220 91 55 2·9 +44 (0) 845 605 4333
SRFIR 750 45 F 750 220 91 55 3·4
SRFIR 900 45 F 900 220 91 55 5·5
substitute SRFIR for SRFOR. All fixed risers radius = 260 mm
following options :
S (stainless steel), E (powder coated) ➔ SRF adjustable risers : see p. 71
70
adjustable risers
50

The adjustable riser can be used as an inside or outside riser for any As many riser segments as necessary may be inserted into the end of
Dimensions
Cat. No. SRFAR W F
Used as
Used as Used asUsed as outside riser
inside
inside riser outside riser
30 Coupling detail
45
90
60
60
90
45
Adjustable riser to straight length coupling
Adjustable risers fit into straight lengths whether they have been cut to
30 length or not, without the need for further drilling
Widths up to 225 =2
90° Widths 300 to 600 =3
Fastener finishes
For adjustable riser with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised
or zinc plated
For adjustable riser with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
For adjustable riser with E finish, the choice of material for fasteners will
90°
us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
Width Weight
Cat. Nos. (W) (kg)
SRFAR 75 F 75 0·7
SRFAR 100 F 100 0·8
SRFAR 150 F 150 1·1
SRFAR 225 F 225 1·8
SRFAR 300 F 300 2·4
SRFAR 450 F 450 3·4
SRFAR 600 F 600 4·4
SRFAR 750 F 750 5·5
SRFAR 900 F 900 6·5
Weights
galvanised G finish
following options :
S (stainless steel), E (powder coated) ➔ SRF inside and outside risers : see p. 70
71
extra long adjustable risers
50

The extra long adjustable riser can be used as an inside or outside As many riser segments as necessary may be inserted into the end of
riser for any angle up to 90° the straight length, thus avoiding the need for cutting
Overall length when flat = 1 087 mm
Dimensions
Cat. No. SRFAXR W F
Used
Used as insideriser
as inside riser
for
forany
any angle uptoto90°
angle up 90°
Coupling detail
Used asoutside
Used as outside riser
riser
for
for any angleupup
any angle to to
90°90°
Used
Used to
to avoid obstacles
avoid obstacles onon
sitesite
Extra long adjustable riser to straight length coupling

Extra long adjustable risers fit into straight lengths whether they have
been cut to length or not, without the need for further drilling
90° see p. 64. Fasteners are not included
Widths up to 225 =2
90° Widths 750 and 900 = 4
Fastener finishes
For adjustable risers with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are
Width Weight galvanised or zinc plated
Cat. Nos. (W) (kg) For adjustable risers with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
SRFAXR 75 F 75 1·4 For adjustable risers with E finish, the choice of material for fasteners
SRFAXR 100 F 100 1·6 will depend on the installation environment. For further information,
contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
SRFAXR 150 F 150 2·1
SRFAXR 225 F 225 3·7
SRFAXR 300 F 300 4·7
SRFAXR 450 F 450 6·8
SRFAXR 600 F 600 8·8
SRFAXR 750 F 750 10·8
SRFAXR 900 F 900 12·9
Weights
galvanised G finish
following options :
S (stainless steel), E (powder coated) ➔ SRF inside and outside risers : see p. 70
72
equal tees
50

Cat. No. SRFT W F
Y Width

Equal tees have integral couplers which fit into straight lengths whether
Z they have been cut to length or not, without the need for further drilling
Width
X
Y = Length of fitting from each end (excluding integral coupler) Widths 300 to 600 =3
Z = End extension of integral coupler Widths 750 and 900 = 4
Fastener finishes
Weight For equal tees with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised or
zinc plated
SRFT 75 F 75 197 320 55 1·0 For equal tees with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
SRFT 100 F 100 222 345 55 1·2 For equal tees with E finish, the choice of material for fasteners will
SRFT 150 F 150 272 395 55 1·6 us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
SRFT 225 F 225 345 467 55 2·2
SRFT 300 F 300 420 542 55 3·8
SRFT 450 F 450 568 690 55 6·2
SRFT 600 F 600 718 840 55 9·1
SRFT 750 F 750 868 990 55 17·0
SRFT 900 F 900 1 018 1 140 55 22·6
Weights
galvanised G finish
125
Stainless steel (S) x 0·94 Minimum cable radius = 125 mm
following options :
S (stainless steel), E (powder coated) ➔ SRF unequal tees : see p. 74-75
73
unequal tees
50

Dimensions
Cat. No. SRFUT W B F
Y B
Z2
Z1
W
X

Dimensions (mm) Dimensions (mm)

Width Width Weight Width Width Weight
(W) (B) Cat. Nos. X Y Z1 Z2 (kg) (W) (B) Cat. Nos. X Y Z1 Z2 (kg)
100 SRFUT 75 100 F 197 345 55 55 1·1 75 SRFUT 300 75 F 420 320 55 55 2·3
150 SRFUT 75 150 F 197 395 55 55 1·2 100 SRFUT 300 100 F 420 342 55 55 2·5
225 SRFUT 75 225 F 195 470 55 55 1·4 150 SRFUT 300 150 F 420 393 55 55 2·8
300 SRFUT 75 300 F 195 545 55 55 2·0 225 SRFUT 300 225 F 420 467 55 55 3·3
75 300
450 SRFUT 75 450 F 194 690 55 55 2·6 450 SRFUT 300 450 F 418 690 55 55 4·9
600 SRFUT 75 600 F 194 840 55 55 3·2 600 SRFUT 300 600 F 418 840 55 55 5·9
750 SRFUT 75 750 F 194 990 55 55 3·8 750 SRFUT 300 750 F 418 990 55 55 9·0
900 SRFUT 75 900 F 194 1 140 55 55 5·7 900 SRFUT 300 900 F 418 1 140 55 55 10·3
75 SRFUT 100 75 F 222 320 55 55 1·1 75 SRFUT 450 75 F 568 320 55 55 3·0
150 SRFUT 100 150 F 222 395 55 55 1·3 100 SRFUT 450 100 F 568 340 55 55 3·3
225 SRFUT 100 225 F 220 467 55 55 1·6 150 SRFUT 450 150 F 568 390 55 55 3·7
300 SRFUT 100 300 F 220 545 55 55 2·2 225 SRFUT 450 225 F 568 465 55 55 4·5
100 450
450 SRFUT 100 450 F 219 690 55 55 2·8 300 SRFUT 450 300 F 568 540 55 55 5·1
600 SRFUT 100 600 F 219 840 55 55 3·4 600 SRFUT 450 600 F 568 840 55 55 7·7
750 SRFUT 100 750 F 219 990 55 55 4·1 750 SRFUT 450 750 F 568 990 55 55 11·7
900 SRFUT 100 900 F 219 1 140 55 55 6·2 900 SRFUT 450 900 F 568 1 140 55 55 13·3
75 SRFUT 150 75 F 272 320 55 55 1·3 75 SRFUT 600 75 F 718 320 55 55 3·8
100 SRFUT 150 100 F 272 345 55 55 1·4 100 SRFUT 600 100 F 718 340 55 55 4·1
225 SRFUT 150 225 F 271 467 55 55 1·8 150 SRFUT 600 150 F 718 390 55 55 4·6
300 SRFUT 150 300 F 271 545 55 55 2·6 225 SRFUT 600 225 F 718 465 55 55 5·5
150 600
450 SRFUT 150 450 F 268 690 55 55 3·3 300 SRFUT 600 300 F 718 540 55 55 6·3
600 SRFUT 150 600 F 268 840 55 55 4·0 450 SRFUT 600 450 F 718 690 55 55 7·9
750 SRFUT 150 750 F 268 990 55 55 4·8 750 SRFUT 600 750 F 718 990 55 55 14·3
900 SRFUT 150 900 F 268 1 140 55 55 7·2 900 SRFUT 600 900 F 718 1 140 55 55 16·4
75 SRFUT 225 75 F 345 320 55 55 1·6 75 SRFUT 750 75 F 868 320 55 55 6·2
100 SRFUT 225 100 F 345 342 55 55 1·7 100 SRFUT 750 100 F 868 340 55 55 6·6
150 SRFUT 225 150 F 345 393 55 55 1·9 150 SRFUT 750 150 F 868 390 55 55 7·4
300 SRFUT 225 300 F 345 542 55 55 3·2 225 SRFUT 750 225 F 868 465 55 55 8·6
225 750
450 SRFUT 225 450 F 343 690 55 55 4·0 300 SRFUT 750 300 F 868 540 55 55 9·8
600 SRFUT 225 600 F 343 840 55 55 5·0 450 SRFUT 750 450 F 868 690 55 55 12·2
750 SRFUT 225 750 F 343 990 55 55 5·7 600 SRFUT 750 600 F 868 840 55 55 14·6
900 SRFUT 225 900 F 343 1 140 55 55 8·7 900 SRFUT 750 900 F 868 1 140 55 55 19·5
75 SRFUT 900 75 F 1 018 320 55 55 7·3
100 SRFUT 900 100 F 1 018 340 55 55 7·7
150 SRFUT 900 150 F 1 018 390 55 55 8·9
225 SRFUT 900 225 F 1 018 465 55 55 10·0
900
300 SRFUT 900 300 F 1 018 540 55 55 11·4
Key : Replace the letter shown in red with your choice from the 450 SRFUT 900 450 F 1 018 690 55 55 14·2
following options :
600 SRFUT 900 600 F 1 018 840 55 55 17·0
F = Finish : G (hot dip galvanised after manufacture), 750 SRFUT 900 750 F 1 018 990 55 55 19·8
74
unequal tees (continued)
50
■ Dimensions and weights (continued)

Weights
galvanised G finish
■ Assembly
Coupling detail

further drilling
Widths up to 225 =2
Fastener finishes
For unequal tees with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised
or zinc plated
For unequal tees with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
For unequal tees with E finish, the choice of material for fasteners will
us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
125
➔ SRF equal tees : see p. 73
75
4 way crosspieces
50

Cat. No. SRFX W F
Z
Width X

Crosspieces have integral couplers which fit into straight lengths
further drilling
Each crosspiece to length joint is secured with M6 x 12 bolts (roofing
Width
X
Fastener finishes
Weight For crosspieces with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised or
Cat. Nos. Width X Z (kg) zinc plated
SRFX 75 F 75 320 55 1·3 For crosspieces with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
SRFX 100 F 100 345 55 1·5 For crosspieces with E finish, the choice of material for fasteners will
SRFX 150 F 150 395 55 1·9 us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
SRFX 225 F 225 467 55 2·7
SRFX 300 F 300 542 55 4·5
SRFX 450 F 450 690 55 7·3
SRFX 600 F 600 840 55 10·6
SRFX 750 F 750 990 55 18·8
SRFX 900 F 900 1 140 55 25·3
Weights
galvanised G finish
the given weight by the following factors : 125
Powder coated (E) x 0·97 Minimum cable radius = 125 mm
following options :
76
straight reducers
50
■ Dimensions and weights ■ Dimensions and weights (continued)

Dimensions
Cat. No. SRFR W K F
K
W
Z2 K
X
Z1
To create the Cat. No. add the main run width (W), the reduced run
Width width (K) and the finish (F)
Example :
X = Length of fitting from each end (excluding integral coupler) For a hot dip galvanised reducer reducing from 300 mm to 150 mm :
Z1 = End extension of integral coupler SRFR 300 150 G
Z2 = End extension of integral coupler Weights
K = Reduced width All weights given are in kilograms (kg) and are for hot dip
galvanised G finish
Dimensions (mm)
Width Weight To obtain the appropriate component weight in other finishes, multiply
Width (K) Cat. Nos. X Z1 Z2 (kg) the given weight by the following factors :
100 75 SRFR 100 75 F 100 55 55 0·3 Deep galvanised (D) x 1·06
75 SRFR 150 75 F 100 55 55 0·4 Pre-galvanised (PG) x 0·96
150
100 SRFR 150 100 F 100 55 55 0·4 Powder coated (E) x 0·97
75 SRFR 225 75 F 100 55 55 0·5
■ Assembly
225 100 SRFR 225 100 F 100 55 55 0·5 Coupling detail
150 SRFR 225 150 F 100 55 55 0·6
75 SRFR 300 75 F 150 55 55 0·6
100 SRFR 300 100 F 100 55 55 0·6
300
150 SRFR 300 150 F 100 55 55 0·6
225 SRFR 300 225 F 100 55 55 0·6
75 SRFR 450 75 F 300 55 55 1·5
100 SRFR 450 100 F 300 55 55 1·5
450 150 SRFR 450 150 F 150 55 55 1·0
225 SRFR 450 225 F 150 55 55 1·0
300 SRFR 450 300 F 100 55 55 1·1 Reducer to straight length coupling
Reducers have integral couplers which fit into straight lengths whether
75 SRFR 600 75 F 300 55 55 1·8 they have been cut to length or not, without the need for further drilling
100 SRFR 600 100 F 300 55 55 1·8 Each reducer to length joint is secured with M6 x 12 bolts (roofing or
150 SRFR 600 150 F 300 55 55 1·9 pan head), nuts and washers or quick bolt fasteners (Cat. No. QBF),
600 see p. 64. Fasteners are not included
225 SRFR 600 225 F 300 55 55 2·0
300 SRFR 600 300 F 150 55 55 2·7 Widths up to 225 =2
450 SRFR 600 450 F 100 55 55 2·7 Widths 300 to 600 =3
75 SRFR 750 75 F 450 55 55 2·6 Widths 750 and 900 = 4
Fastener finishes
100 SRFR 750 100 F 450 55 55 2·6 For reducers with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised or
150 SRFR 750 150 F 300 55 55 2·6 zinc plated
750 225 SRFR 750 225 F 300 55 55 2·9 For reducers with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
For reducers with E finish, the choice of material for fasteners will
300 SRFR 750 300 F 300 55 55 3·1 depend on the installation environment. For further information, contact
450 SRFR 750 450 F 300 55 55 3·4 us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
600 SRFR 750 600 F 100 55 55 3·8
75 SRFR 900 75 F 450 55 55 4·2
100 SRFR 900 100 F 450 55 55 4·4
150 SRFR 900 150 F 450 55 55 4·4
225 SRFR 900 225 F 450 55 55 4·6
900
300 SRFR 900 300 F 300 55 55 5·5
450 SRFR 900 450 F 300 55 55 5·8
600 SRFR 900 600 F 300 55 55 6·1
750 SRFR 900 750 F 100 55 55 6·3
following options :
77
SRF to MRF straight reducers
50

Cat. No. SRFMRFR W F Coupling detail
Z2 MRF
Z1 SRF
Width
Weight
Cat. Nos. Width X Y Z (kg) Straight reducer to straight length coupling
SRFMRFR 75 F 75 150 55 55 0·2 Reducers have integral coupers which fit into straight lengths whether
SRFMRFR 100 F 100 150 55 55 0·3 they have been cut to length or not, without the need for further drilling
Each reducer to length joint is secured with M6 x 12 bolts (roofing or
SRFMRFR 150 F 150 150 55 55 0·4
SRFMRFR 225 F 225 150 55 55 0·5 see p. 64. Fasteners are not included
SRFMRFR 300 F 300 150 55 55 0·6 Minimum number of fasteners per joint :
SRFMRFR 450 F 450 150 55 55 1·1 Widths up to 225 =2
SRFMRFR 600 F 600 150 55 55 1·4
SRFMRFR 750 F 750 150 55 55 1·4 Fastener finishes
SRFMRFR 900 F 900 150 55 55 2·2 For reducers with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised or
zinc plated
Dimensions For reducers with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
X = Length of fitting from each end (excluding integral coupler) For reducers with E finish, the choice of material for fasteners will
Z1 = End extension of integral coupler depend on the installation environment. For further information, contact
Z2 = End extension of integral coupler us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
Weights
galvanised G finish
Key : Replace the letter shown in red with your choice from the All dimensions (mm) are nominal
following options :
F = Finish : G (hot dip galvanised after manufacture), ➔ MRF straight lengths : see p. 46
S (stainless steel), E (powder coated) ➔ SRF straight lengths : see p. 62
78
handed reducers
■ On-site fabrication of fittings

For on-site fabrication of fittings, including left or right handed reducers, use universal brackets and fishplates, see p. 85
Left and right handed reducers are not currently available as a standard factory fabricated fitting

Figures show approximated reduced widths
SRFL
Smaller Size 75 mm 100 mm 150 mm 225 mm 300 mm 450 mm 600 mm 750 mm
Larger Size Handed Straight Handed Straight Handed Straight Handed Straight Handed Straight Handed Straight Handed Straight Handed Straight
100 mm 25 12 – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
150 mm 75 37 50 25 – – – – – – – – – – – –
225 mm 150 75 125 62 75 37 – – – – – – – – – –
300 mm – 112 200 100 150 75 75 37 – – – – – – – –
450 mm – – – 175 – 150 – 112 150 75 – – – – – –
600 mm – – – – – – – 187 – 150 150 75 – – – –
750 mm – – – – – – – – – – – 150 150 75 – –
900 mm – – – – – – – – – – – – – 150 150 75
➔ Universal bracket : see p. 65

➔ Universal fishplate : see p. 65
79
Swifts® XRF extra heavy duty return flange
straight lengths
80

and span conditions
250
600
Cat. No. XRFL W F
200

300
150
Dimensions
Standard length 3 m
100
150
25
25
50
25
25
15·5
9·5
37·5 37·5 19 2·5 3·0 2·0

Span (m)
On XRF lengths the graph shows the maximum safe working load when
a fishplate is fitted across the underside of each length-to-length joint.
10 Typical cable loads which are normally 50% of the maximum would not
require a fishplate
80
t Additional finishes :
D Deep galvanised high silicon steel made from
BS EN 10025-5 : 2004 Grade S355JOWP
Width S Stainless steel to BS EN 10088 – 2 grade 1·4404
(equivalent to 316L31)
Gauges and weights
The gauge ‘t’ for each cable tray width and finish varies by
product and range Sheared steel (particularly stainless steel)
contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333 does have relatively sharp edges and protective
gloves must be worn during handling
Cat. Nos. (mm) (kg) G finish only
XRFL 100 F 100 9·0 1·2
XRFL 150 F 150 10·2 1·2
XRFL 225 F 225 13·0 1·2
XRFL 300 F 300 15·3 1·5
XRFL 450 F 450 26·4 1·5
XRFL 600 F 600 32·5 2·0
All weights given are in kilograms (kg) and are for a 3 m straight length in
hot dip galvanised G finish
To obtain the appropriate component weight in other finishes, multiply the

following options : ➔ Coupler sets : see p. 81
D (deep galvanised), S (stainless steel) ➔ Fishplates : see p. 101
80
XRF straight length to straight length couplers
■ Standard couplers ■ Straight length to fitting coupling

Couplers are required for joining together XRF straight lengths or cut Cable tray fittings must be properly supported. The ideal location
lengths of tray without the need for further drilling for supports is shown in step 2, i.e. 150 mm from the fitting to length
joint. For further details see Design Notes, Recommended Support
XRFC standard couplers are supplied in pairs
Locations, see p. 128
Supplied without fasteners – use M6 nuts, bolts and washers (see
opposite) 1
■ Assembly
Where necessary re-align
the fitting flange tabs from
their transit position to their
Bring together two lengths and fit a coupler on the outside of adjacent installation position
Locate the coupler as shown and insert two roofing bolts through
aligning slots in each tray bed and coupler (four bolts per
coupler), and secure with roofing washers and nuts
2 Uncut Cut
length; the cut end should
be connected to the fitting
150mm
Support
Cat. Nos. XRFC F 3
Offer the fitting at an angle
to the straight length and
Fasteners locate, ensuring that the
For For A Coupler flanges
G and D S B Roofing washer
finish finish C M6 square nut
D D D Straight length 4
H E M6 x 12 roofing bolt Insert roofing bolts through
E
F M6 form A washer slots in the tray bed in to
G M6 hexagon nut aligning slots in the fitting
H M6 x 12 pan head fishplate and secure with
screw roofing washers and nuts
A B C A F G
Fastener finishes
For lengths and fittings with G and D finishes fasteners are galvanised
or zinc plated. For trays and fittings with S finish, fasteners are
corrosion resistant stainless Grade A470 Note
■ Dimensions and weights Fasteners stated are for D and G finishes
For lengths and fittings with S finish use fasteners listed below
Cat. No. XRFC F Fasteners
245
Widths up to 225 =2
Widths 300 to 600 = 3
Weight
Cat. Nos. (kg)
1·5 XRFC F 0·9 pair
For G and D A M6 x 12 roofing bolt
finish For S finish B Roofing washer
A F C M6 square nut
85 D Fitting
Five 35 x 8
E Straight length
slots F M6 x 12 pan head
B C D E G H D E screw
39 G M6 form A washer
Weights H M6 hexagon nut
galvanised G finish Fastener finish
To obtain the appropriate component weight in other finishes, multiply For lengths and fittings with G and D finishes, fasteners are galvanised
the given weight by the following factors : or zinc plated. For trays and fittings with S finish, fasteners are
Deep galvanised (D) x 1·06 corrosion resistant stainless Grade A470
following options :
D (deep galvanised), S (stainless steel) ➔ Straight lengths : see p. 80
81
Swifts® XRF extra heavy duty fittings
flat bends – 90°, 60°, 45° and 30°
80
■ 90° dimensions and weights ■ 45° dimensions and weights

Cat. No. XRFB W F Cat. No. XRFB W 45 F
90°
Y 45°
Y
Z
Z
Width Width
X X
Weight Weight
Cat. Nos. Width X Y Z (kg) Cat. Nos. Width X Y Z (kg)
XRFB 100 F 100 280 280 55 1·6 XRFB 100 45 F 100 153 198 55 1·0
XRFB 150 F 150 330 330 55 2·0 XRFB 150 45 F 150 203 233 55 1·2
XRFB 225 F 225 405 405 55 2·8 XRFB 225 45 F 225 278 286 55 1·6
XRFB 300 F 300 480 480 55 3·6 XRFB 300 45 F 300 353 339 55 2·1
XRFB 450 F 450 690 690 55 8·7 XRFB 450 45 F 450 520 488 55 5·0
XRFB 600 F 600 840 840 55 12·2 XRFB 600 45 F 600 670 594 55 6·9

Cat. No. XRFB W 60 F Cat. No. XRFB W 30 F
Y
60° 30°
Y
Z Width
X
Width
Weight
X Cat. Nos. Width X Y Z (kg)
XRFB 100 30 F 100 124 140 55 0·8
Weight XRFB 150 30 F 150 174 165 55 0·9
XRFB 100 60 F 100 190 242 55 1·2 XRFB 225 30 F 225 249 202 55 1·2
XRFB 150 60 F 150 240 286 55 1·6 XRFB 300 30 F 300 324 240 55 1·6
XRFB 225 60 F 225 315 351 55 2·1 XRFB 450 30 F 450 482 345 55 3·5
XRFB 300 60 F 300 390 416 55 2·8 XRFB 600 30 F 600 632 420 55 5·0
XRFB 450 60 F 450 570 598 55 6·5
XRFB 600 60 F 600 720 727 55 9·2
following options :
82
flat bends – 90°, 60°, 45° and 30° (continued)
80
Z = End extension of integral coupler Width (mm) Radius (mm)
Weights
100 to 300 180
galvanised G finish 450 and 600 240
RADIUS

Coupling detail Minimum bend radius for cables – flat bends 60°, 45° and 30°
Width (mm) Radius (mm)
100 to 300 180

450 and 600 240
RADIUS

pan head), nuts and washers, see p. 81. Fasteners are not included
Widths up to 225 =2
Fastener finishes
For bends with G and D finishes, fasteners are galvanised or zinc
plated
For bends with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
following options :
83
80

Dimensions Dimensions
Cat. No. XRFIR W F Cat. No. XRFOR W F Cat. No. XRFIR W 45 F Cat. No. XRFOR W 45 F
90° inside 90° outside 45° 45°
riser riser inside outside
riser riser
Z
Z R R X
Y R X R
Y Z
Z
X
X
Y
Y
Weight
Weight XRFIR 100 45 F 100 234 97 55 1·2
XRFOR 100 45 F 100 233 96 55 1·3
XRFIR 100 F 100 241 241 55 2·2
XRFIR 150 45 F 150 234 97 55 1·7
XRFOR 100 F 100 240 240 55 2·6
XRFOR 150 45 F 150 233 96 55 1·7
XRFIR 150 F 150 241 241 55 2·5
XRFIR 225 45 F 225 234 97 55 2·0
XRFOR 150 F 150 240 240 55 2·9
XRFOR 225 45 F 225 233 96 55 2·2
XRFIR 225 F 225 241 241 55 2·9
XRFIR 300 45 F 300 234 97 55 2·3
XRFOR 225 F 225 240 240 55 3·3
XRFOR 300 45 F 300 233 96 55 2·4
XRFIR 300 F 300 241 241 55 3·3
XRFIR 450 45 F 450 266 110 55 4·1
XRFOR 300 F 300 240 240 55 3·8
XRFOR 450 45 F 450 265 110 55 4·3
XRFIR 450 F 450 295 295 55 6·2
XRFIR 600 45 F 600 266 110 55 5·1
XRFOR 450 F 450 293 293 55 6·6
XRFOR 600 45 F 600 265 110 55 5·3
XRFIR 600 F 600 295 295 55 7·6
■ 30° dimensions and weights

XRFOR 600 F 600 293 293 55 8·1
■ 60° dimensions and weights

Dimensions
Cat. No. XRFIR W 30 F Cat. No. XRFOR W 30 F
Dimensions
Cat. No. XRFIR W 60 F Cat. No. XRFOR W 60 F 30° 30°
inside outside
60° inside riser 60° outside riser riser riser
Z
R R X
Z R Z
R Y
X
Y X
Z
Y
X
Weight
Y
XRFIR 100 30 F 100 201 54 55 1·1
Weight XRFOR 100 30 F 100 200 54 55 1·1
XRFIR 150 30 F 150 201 54 55 1·3
XRFIR 100 60 F 100 172 99 55 2·0 XRFOR 150 30 F 150 200 54 55 1·5
XRFOR 100 60 F 100 230 133 55 1·4 XRFIR 225 30 F 225 201 54 55 1·9
XRFIR 150 60 F 150 172 99 55 2·1 XRFOR 225 30 F 225 200 54 55 1·7
XRFOR 150 60 F 150 230 133 55 2·5 XRFIR 300 30 F 300 201 54 55 1·9
XRFIR 225 60 F 225 172 99 55 2·4 XRFOR 300 30 F 300 200 54 55 2·0
XRFOR 225 60 F 225 230 133 55 2·8 XRFIR 450 30 F 450 217 58 55 3·4
XRFIR 300 60 F 300 172 99 55 2·8 XRFOR 450 30 F 450 217 58 55 3·5
XRFOR 300 60 F 300 230 133 55 3·1 XRFIR 600 30 F 600 217 58 55 4·1
XRFIR 450 60 F 450 212 122 55 4·9 XRFOR 600 30 F 600 217 58 55 4·2
XRFOR 450 60 F 450 270 161 55 5·3
XRFIR 600 60 F 600 212 122 55 6·0
XRFOR 600 60 F 600 270 161 55 6·4
following options :
84
inside and outside risers – 90°, 60°, 45° and 30° (continued)
80
■ Dimensions and weights – inside and outside risers

90°, 60°, 45° and 30°
Dimensions
Weights
galvanised G finish
■ Assembly – inside and outside risers 90°, 60°, 45° and 30°
Coupling detail
Riser to straight length coupling

Risers have integral couplers which fit into straight lengths whether
head), nuts and washers, see p. 81. Fasteners are not included
Widths 300 to 600 = 3
Fastener finishes
For risers with G and D finishes, fasteners are galvanised or zinc
plated. For risers with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
Minimum bend radius for cables – 90°, 60°, 45° and 30°
Width (W) Radius (R)
(mm) (mm)
100 180
150 180
225 180
300 180
450 240
600 240
following options :
85
equal tees
80

Cat. No. XRFT W F
Y Width

Z Equal tees have integral couplers which fit into straight lengths whether
Width
pan head), nuts and washers, see p. 81. Fasteners are not included
X
X = Length of fitting from each end (excluding integral coupler) Widths up to 225 = 2
Widths 300 to 600 = 3
Fastener finishes
For equal tees with G and D finishes, fasteners are galvanised or zinc
Weight plated. For equal tees with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
XRFT 100 F 100 280 460 55 2·7 Minimum bend radius for cables
XRFT 150 F 150 330 510 55 3·4
XRFT 225 F 225 405 585 55 4·4
XRFT 300 F 300 480 660 55 5·7
XRFT 450 F 450 690 930 55 13·3
Width (mm) Radius (mm)
XRFT 600 F 600 840 1 080 55 18·2
Weights 100 to 300 180
All weights given are in kilograms (kg) and are for hot dip 450 and 600 240
galvanised G finish
To obtain the appropriate component weight in other finishes, multiply Radius
following options :
D (deep galvanised), S (stainless steel) ➔ XRF unequal tees : see p. 87
86
unequal tees
80

Cat. No. XRFUT W B F
X = Length of fitting from

each end (excluding integral
coupler)
Y = Length of fitting from
each end (excluding integral
Y B
coupler)
Z = End extension of integral
coupler
Z2
Z1
W whether ithey have been cut to length or not, without the need for
X further drilling
or pan head), nuts and washers, see p. 81. Fasteners are not included
Dimensions (mm) Minimum number of fasteners per joint :
Width Width Weight Widths up to 225 = 2
(W) (B) Cat. Nos. X Y Z (kg)
Widths 300 to 600 = 3
150 XRFUT 100 150 F 280 510 55 2·9 Fastener finishes
225 XRFUT 100 225 F 280 585 55 3·2 For unequal tees with G and D finishes, fasteners are galvanised or
100 300 XRFUT 100 300 F 280 660 55 3·6 zinc plated. For unequal tees with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel
450 XRFUT 100 450 F 280 810 55 4·4 Minimum bend radius for cables
600 XRFUT 100 600 F 280 960 55 5·2
100 XRFUT 150 100 F 330 460 55 2·9
225 XRFUT 150 225 F 330 585 55 3·6 Width (mm) Radius (mm)
150 300 XRFUT 150 300 F 330 660 55 4·1
450 XRFUT 150 450 F 330 810 55 6·6 100 to 300 180
600 XRFUT 150 600 F 330 960 55 7·8 450 and 600 240
100 XRFUT 225 100 F 405 460 55 3·9
150 XRFUT 225 150 F 405 510 55 3·8 Radius
225 300 XRFUT 225 300 F 405 660 55 4·7
450 XRFUT 225 450 F 405 810 55 7·8
600 XRFUT 225 600 F 405 960 55 9·1
100 XRFUT 300 100 F 480 460 55 4·1
150 XRFUT 300 150 F 480 510 55 4·5
300 225 XRFUT 300 225 F 480 585 55 5·0
450 XRFUT 300 450 F 480 810 55 8·9
600 XRFUT 300 600 F 480 960 55 10·3
100 XRFUT 450 100 F 690 580 55 8·3
150 XRFUT 450 150 F 690 630 55 9·2
450 225 XRFUT 450 225 F 690 705 55 10·2
300 XRFUT 450 300 F 690 780 55 11·2
600 XRFUT 450 600 F 690 1 080 55 15·3
100 XRFUT 600 100 F 840 580 55 10·2
150 XRFUT 600 150 F 840 630 55 11·0
600 225 XRFUT 600 225 F 840 705 55 12·2
300 XRFUT 600 300 F 840 780 55 13·4
450 XRFUT 600 450 F 840 930 55 15·8
Weights
galvanised G finish
following options :
D (deep galvanised), S (stainless steel) ➔ XRF equal tees : see p. 86
87
4 way crosspieces
80

Cat. No. XRFX W F
Width X

4 way crosspieces have integral couplers which fit into straight lengths
further drilling
Width Each 4 way crosspiece to length joint is secured with M6 x 12 bolts
X (roofing or pan head), nuts and washers, see p. 81. Fasteners are not
included
X = Length of fitting from each end (excluding integral coupler) Minimum number of fasteners per joint :
Z = End extension of integral coupler Widths up to 225 = 2
Weight
Widths 300 to 600 = 3
Cat. Nos. Width X Z (kg) Fastener finishes
XRFX 100 F 100 460 55 2·7 For 4 way crosspieces with G and D finishes, fasteners are galvanised
or zinc plated. For 4 way crosspieces with S finish, fasteners are
XRFX 150 F 150 510 55 4·3
stainless steel
XRFX 225 F 225 585 55 5·5
XRFX 300 F 300 660 55 6·8
XRFX 450 F 450 930 55 16·1
XRFX 600 F 600 1 080 55 22·1
Weights
All weights given are in kilograms (kg) and are for hot dip Width (mm) Radius (mm)
galvanised G finish
To obtain the appropriate component weight in other finishes, multiply 100 to 300 180
the given weight by the following factors : 450 and 600 240
Radius
following options :
88
straight reducers
80

Cat. No. XRFR W K F
K
Z2
Z1
Reducers to straight length coupling

Width
Reducers have integral couplers which fit into straight lengths whether
X = Length of fitting from each end (excluding integral coupler) Each reducer to length joint is secured with M6 x 12 bolts (roofing or
Z1 = End extension of integral coupler pan head), nuts and washers, see p. 81. Fasteners are not included
Z2 = End extension of integral coupler Minimum number of fasteners per joint :
Dimensions (mm)
Width Weight Widths 300 to 600 = 3
Width (K) Cat. Nos. X Z1 Z2 (kg) Fastener finishes
150 100 XRFR 150 100 F 100 55 55 0·8 For straight reducers with G and D finishes, fasteners are galvanised or
zinc plated. For straight reducers with S finish, fasteners are stainless
100 XRFR 225 100 F 100 55 55 0·8
225 steel
150 XRFR 225 150 F 100 55 55 0·9
100 XRFR 300 100 F 150 55 55 1·2
300 150 XRFR 300 150 F 100 55 55 1·0
225 XRFR 300 225 F 100 55 55 1·1
100 XRFR 450 100 F 250 55 55 2·0
150 XRFR 450 150 F 150 55 55 1·5
450
225 XRFR 450 225 F 150 55 55 1·6
300 XRFR 450 300 F 100 55 55 1·5
100 XRFR 600 100 F 300 55 55 2·7
150 XRFR 600 150 F 250 55 55 2·5
600 225 XRFR 600 225 F 200 55 55 2·2
300 XRFR 600 300 F 150 55 55 2·1
450 XRFR 600 450 F 100 55 55 2·3
To create the Cat. No., add the main run width (W), the reduced run
width (K) and the finish (F)
Example :
For a hot dip galvanised reducer reducing from 300 mm to 150 mm :
XRFR 300 150 G
Weights
galvanised G finish
following options :
89
12
Swifts® cable tray supports or
18
25
light duty cantilever arms
50 80
Light duty cantilever arms enable horizontal runs of cable tray to be ■ Assembly (continued)
mounted to vertical steel, concrete or masonry surfaces or to Swiftrack Fasteners (not included) (continued)
channel. They are available in eight sizes to accommodate all tray
widths Fastener finishes
Cantilever arms are of fabricated construction with a bottom flange on For straight lengths with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised
arms 600 mm wide and above for extra strength or zinc plated. For straight lengths with S finish, fasteners are stainless
steel
Supplied singly without fasteners For straight lengths with E finish, the choice of material for fasteners will
■ Installation (typical) depend on the installation environment. For further information contact
us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
Recommended safe (1) Per cantilever arm for load uniformly distributed
Cat. Nos. working load, kgf (1) accross complete arm using two fixing holes
Safety factor: 2
LCA 100 F 120(2) (2) When one fixing hole is used the
LCA 150 F 120(2) recommended safe working load = 100 kgf
LCA 225 F 150

LCA 300 F 150
LCA 450 F 150
LCA 600 F 300
LCA 750 F 300
LCA 900 F 300
Dimensions
Cat. No. LCA W F
■ Assembly
100 to 450 mm 25
Tray to cantilever arm tray widths
All light duty cantilever arms have slots in the top flange for fixing tray
A
Fit two fasteners for trays up to 300 wide
Fit three fasteners for trays 450 wide and above C
B
Two holes
Ø11
X 25
43 3
A C
600 to 900 mm
B
tray widths
Note
If covers are fitted the clearance to the vertical support face must be
approximately 40 mm (x), however for access to fit cover clips a larger Two holes
clearance may be required when the vertical support is a solid face Ø11
3
Cantilever arm to vertical support
All light duty cantilever arms have two Ø 11 holes for M10 fasteners
(not included) 43
Cat. Nos. LCA 100 and LCA 150 may be fitted using the top fixing hole Width Weight
only, however the recommended safe working load is reduced - see Cat. Nos. (W) A B C (kg)
table opposite
LCA 100 F 100 140 75 30 0·3
When fixing to Swiftrack channel use grade 8.8 setscrews, form A flat
washers and channel nuts LCA 150 F 150 190 75 30 0·4
LCA 225 F 225 265 90 45 0·6
LCA 300 F 300 340 90 45 0·8
For G, D and LCA 450 F 450 490 120 75 1·2
PG finish A LCA 600 F 600 640 180 125 2·6
A M6 x 12 roofing bolt LCA 750 F 750 790 230 175 4·2
B Roofing washer
B
C M6 square nut LCA 900 F 900 940 280 225 5·7
C D E
D Cantilever arm Weights
E Straight length All weights given are in kilograms (kg) and are for hot dip
For S finish F M6 x 12 panhead screw galvanised G finish
F G M6 form A washer To obtain the appropriate component weight in other finishes, multiply
H M6 hexagon nut the given weight by the following factors :
G H D E Stainless steel (S) x 0·94
following options :
F = Finish : G (hot dip galvanised after manufacture), ➔ Straight lengths : see p. 36, 46, 62, 80
S (stainless steel), E (powder coated) ➔ Swiftrack channel support : see p. 102-110
90
12
18
25
light duty cantilever brackets
50 80
Light duty cantilever brackets are suitable for supporting horizontal ■ Dimensions and weights
runs of lightly loaded trays in widths up to 150 mm. They can be Dimensions
mounted to vertical steel concrete or masonry surfaces or Swiftrack
channel Cat. No. LCB W F
Supplied singly without fasteners 50 and 75 mm 100 and 150 mm
tray widths tray widths
■ Installation (typical) (G and E finishes only)
A
3
A
5
50 C B
C B
Cat. No. LCB 75 F 45
shown with SS tray Cat. No. LCB 150 F
shown with SRF tray Cat. Width Weight
Nos. (W) A B C (kg)
■ Assembly LCB 50 F 50 50 63 37 0·1
Cantilever bracket to vertical support LCB 75 F 75 75 75 37 0·2
Slots are provided for two M6 fasteners - type, length and finish to suit LCB 100 F 100 105 80 45 0·3
application
LCB 150 F 150 150 80 45 0·4
When fixing to Swiftrack channel use grade 8.8 setscrews, form A flat
washers and channel nuts Weights
Tray to cantilever bracket All weights given are in kilograms (kg) and are for hot dip
galvanised G finish
SS, MRF and SRF the given weight by the following factors :
For G, D and Deep galvanised (D) x 1·06
PG finish
A M6 x 12 roofing bolt Stainless steel (S) x 0·94
A B Roofing washer Pre-galvanised (PG) x 0·96
C M6 square nut Powder coated (E) x 0·97
D Cantilever bracket
B E Straight length
C D E
F M6 x 12 panhead screw
G M6 form A washer
H M6 hexagon nut
XRF
For S finish
F
B Roofing washer
C M6 square nut
D Cantilever bracket
G H D E E Straight length
G M6 form A washer
H M6 hexagon nut
Fastener finishes
For straight lengths with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised
or zinc plated. For straight lengths with S finish, fasteners are stainless
steel
For straight lengths with E finish, the choice of material for fasteners will
depend on the installation environment. For further information contact
us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
Recommended safe
Cat. Nos. working load, kgf (3)
LCB 50(1) F 15
LCB 75(1) F 15
LCB 100(2) F 20
LCB 150(2) F 20
(1) 50-75 mm not available in D finish
(2) 100-150 mm not available in D, PG and S finishes
(3) Per bracket for load uniformly distributed across complete bracket
following options :
F = Finish : G (hot dip galvanised after manufacture), ➔ Straight lengths : see p. 36, 46, 62, 80
S (stainless steel), E (powder coated) ➔ Swiftrack channel support : see p. 102-110
91
12
18
25
overhead hangers
50 80
Overhead hangers are suitable for supporting all cable tray ranges up ■ Dimensions and weights
to 150 mm wide. They enable tray to be supported from a single M10 Dimensions
threaded rod giving easy access for laying cables from one side of the
tray only Cat. No. OH W F
28
Supplied singly without fasteners
Ø11 2
D
A
C
■ Assembly Cat. Width Weight

Nos. (W) A B C D (kg)
Overhead hanger to threaded rod
OH 50 F 50 85 132 28 48 0·1
OH 75 F 75 117 181 28 50 0·2
OH 100 F 100 146 183 53 50 0·3
A
B A M10 threaded rod OH 150 F 150 206 181 53 50 0·4
C B M10 nut
C Hanger Weights
D D Form A flat washer All weights given are in kilograms (kg) and are for hot dip
galvanised G finish
Tray to overhead hanger Deep galvanised (D) x 1·06
Fasteners (not included) Stainless steel (S) x 0·94
For G, D and
PG finish A
B B Roofing washer
C D E C M6 square nut
D Hanger
E Straight length
H M6 hexagon nut
G H D E
Fastener finishes
steel
us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
Recommended safe
Cat. Nos. working load, kgf (1)
OH 50 F 25
OH 75 F 50
OH 100 F 50
OH 150 F 50
(1) Per hanger for load uniformly distributed across tray width
Safety factor : 2
following options :
S (stainless steel), E (powder coated) ➔ Straight lengths : see p. 36, 46, 62, 80
92
12
18
25
light duty trapeze hangers
50 80
Light duty trapeze hangers are suitable for use with all cable tray ■ Assembly (continued)
ranges. They enable all widths of tray to be supported from overhead
threaded rods hung from ceiling brackets, Swiftrack support system or Tray to trapeze hanger
from beam clamps attached to joists or steel beams Fasteners (not included)
Light duty trapeze hangers are supplied singly without fasteners
For G, D and
PG finish A
B Roofing washer
B C M6 square nut
C D E D Hanger
E Straight length
H M6 hexagon nut
G H D E
Fastener finishes
steel
us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
Dimensions
Cat. No. LTH W F
50-150 mm 600-900 mm
■ Assembly
tray width tray width
Ø11 holes in 50-150 45
centre slots 50
Trapeze hanger to threaded rod for rod A
B
There are three alternative methods of fixing trapeze hangers to
threaded rods as shown below. All three methods are applicable to A
B
trapeze hangers for 600 - 900mm widths, but only type B applies to 225-450 mm
narrower trapeze hangers. The recommended safe working load for tray width
each width and method of fixing is given in the table 45
Four Ø14
holes for
A A A rod C
600-900
B B B A
Two Ø11 B
C C C holes for
225-450
rod
D D D
C
B
C
E E Cat. Width Rod Weight
Nos. (W) A B C size (kg)
Type A Type B Type C LTH 50 F 50 108 75 – M10 0·1

Recommended SWL, (kgf ) (1)
A M10 or M12 threaded rod LTH 75 F 75 145 112 – M10 0·1
Cat. Nos. Type A Type B Type C B M10 or M12 nut LTH 100 F 100 183 150 – M10 0·2
LTH 50 F – 100 – C Washer LTH 150 F 150 220 187 – M10 0·2
D Upper flange
LTH 75 F – 100 – E Lower flange LTH 225 F 225 305 280 25 M10 0·3
LTH 100 F – 100 – LTH 300 F 300 380 355 25 M10 0·4
LTH 150 F – 100 – LTH 450 F 450 530 505 40 M10 0·7
LTH 225 F – 200 – LTH 600 F 600 700 660 60 M12 1·6
LTH 300 F – 270 – LTH 750 F 750 850 810 70 M12 2·1
LTH 450 F – 300 – LTH 900 F 900 1 000 960 80 M12 2·7
LTH 600 F 500 300 150 Weights
LTH 750 F 500 300 150 All weights given are in kilograms (kg) and are for hot dip
galvanised G finish
LTH 900 F 500 300 150
(1) Per hanger for load uniformly distributed across the given weight by the following factors :
complete hanger
Safety factor : 2 Deep galvanised (D) x 1·06
following options :
93
12
18
25
stand-off brackets
50 80
Stand-off brackets are suitable for supporting horizontal or vertical ■ Assembly (continued)
runs of cable tray when fitted to vertical steel, concrete or masonry
SWL (kgf(1))
surfaces or Swiftrack channel. They are also ideal for floor mounted Cat. Nos. A horizontal vertical
tray installations tray run tray run
Brackets are available in a range of widths to suit all tray types and STB 50 F 82 40 –
sizes; widths 450 mm and above being formed in a ‘Z’ section for extra
strength. Supplied singly without fasteners STB 75 F 120 40 –
■ Installation (typical) STB 100 F 157 40 –
STB 150 F 195 40 –
STB 225 F 273 100 –
STB 300 F 349 100 –
STB 450 F 485 150 150
STB 600 F 635 150 150
STB 750 F 785 150 150 (1) Per stand-off bracket for load uniformly
distributed across the tray width
Cat. No. STB 450 F STB 900 F 935 150 150
Fitted to floor
Dimensions 450-900 mm
Cat. No. STB W F tray width
Cat. No. STB 300 F Cat. No. STB 450 F B Ø11 hole
Fitted to Swiftrack Fitted to vertical surface
■ Assembly
50-300 mm
Stand-off bracket to support tray width
50-300 mm 450 mm 600-900 mm Two Ø11 holes
tray width tray width tray width in centre slots
Y Y Y
35
A
X
50
X Y
Cat. Nos. Fasteners(1) Centres Stand-off
Cat. Width Weight
STB 50 F M6 or M10(2) 82 40 Nos. (W) A B (kg)
STB 75 F M6 or M10(2) 120 40 STB 50 F 50 45 40 0·1
STB 100 F M6 or M10(2) 157 40 STB 75 F 75 82 40 0·1
STB 150 F M6 or M10(2) 195 40 STB 100 F 100 120 40 0·2
STB 225 F M6 or M10(2) 273 40 STB 150 F 150 157 40 0·2
STB 300 F M6 or M10(2) 349 40 (1) Type, length and finish to suit STB 225 F 225 236 41 0·3
STB 450 F M10 485 60 application STB 300 F 300 311 41 0·4
When fixing to Swiftrack
STB 600 F M10 635 60 channel use grade 8.8 STB 450 F 450 535 60 1·2
setscrews, form A washers
STB 750 F M10 785 60 and channel nuts STB 600 F 600 685 60 1·6
(2) No.12 woodscrews may
STB 900 F M10 935 60 be used STB 750 F 750 835 60 1·9
STB 900 F 900 985 60 2·3
Tray to stand-off bracket
Fasteners (not included) Weights
A M6 x 12 roofing bolt All weights given are in kilograms (kg) and are for hot dip
For G, D and
B Roofing washer galvanised G finish
PG finish
C M6 square nut To obtain the appropriate component weight in other finishes, multiply
A B D Bracket the given weight by the following factors :
E Straight length Deep galvanised (D) x 1·06
C F M6 x 12 panhead screw Stainless steel (S) x 0·94
G M6 form A washer Pre-galvanised (PG) x 0·96
D H M6 hexagon nut Powder coated (E) x 0·97
E
For S finish Fastener finishes
F
For straight lengths with G, D and PG finishes,
G fasteners are galvanised or zinc plated. For All dimensions (mm) are nominal
straight lengths with S finish, fasteners are
H stainless steel. For straight lengths with E finish, ➔ Straight lengths : see p. 36, 46, 62, 80
the choice of material for fasteners will depend
D on the installation environment. For further
E information contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333 ➔ Swiftrack channel supports : see p. 102-110
94
12
Swifts® cable tray ancillary items or
18
25
dividers
50 80
Used to separate different types or groups of cable within one cable ■ Dimensions and weights
tray run
Supplied singly without fasteners Without
With return
return flange
flange
Cat. No. SRFDV F
3 000
3 000
A
A
35
35
S finish G, PG, D and E finishes
Weight (kg)
Cat. Nos. A G PG D S E
SDV F 30 2·3 2·0 2·6 2·6 2·3
MRFDV F 30 2·3 2·1 2·6 2·6 2·3
SRFDV F 55 3·2 2·7 3·6 3·7 3·2
XRFDV F 55 3·2 2·9 3·6 3·7 3·2
■ Assembly
For quantity required see table below
For G, D and
E finish
A B
B Divider
C Roofing washer
D M6 square nut
C D E
E Straight length
For S finish F M6 x 1 2 panhead screw
G M6 form A washer
F B H M6 hexagon nut
G H E
Tray range
SS MRF SRF XRF
Cat. Nos. SSDV MRFDV SRFDV XRFDV
Quantity of fasteners
per 3 m length 5 5 5 5
Fastener finishes
steel. For straight lengths with E finish, the choice of material for
fasteners will depend on the installation environment. For further
information contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
following options :
95
12
18
25
earth continuity connector
50 80
When fixing tray, a supplementary bonding conductor for equipotential ■ Dimensions and weights
earthing may be required in certain cases and conditions
This will depend on the type of cables used, the environment and fault
current on the cables. A flexible earth continuity connector is available
for this purpose and is designed to fit onto all types of tray 93 (hole centres)
Earth continuity connectors are supplied in bagged quantities of 20 1·0
without fasteners
Use M6 x 12 mm roofing nuts and bolts
Copper braid and copper lugs both in electrotinned finish
Length between centres : 93 mm. Conductor area : 4 mm2
Electro tinned copper finish Hole Ø6·4 Copper lug to Conductor area
4·0 mm2 (Copper braid 23
BS 6017 (1981)
to BS 4109)
Cat. No. PTFEB
SRF
(MRF, SS,
XRF similar)
■ Assembly
Fasteners not included
Butt-jointed lengths Fasteners shown for G and
D finishes (two per connector)
A
B
F
C
C
D G
E H
Joggle-jointed lengths A B
Fasteners for
S finish
C
D
E
B Tray side flange
C Earth continuity connector
D M6 roofing washer
E M6 roofing nut
F M6 x 12 pan head screw
G M6 form A washer
H M6 hex nut
Fastener finish
For E finish tray fasteners, contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
➔ Straight lengths : see p. 36, 46, 62, 80
96
12
18
25
covers for straight lengths
50 80
Tray covers can be installed either close to the tray side flanges ■ Assembly
(closed covers) or, for all tray ranges except XRF, raised above the Before fitting the covers ensure a clearance of 10 mm between the tray
flanges providing an air gap (ventilated covers) and the vertical support face
Covers up to 450 mm wide have a flat top surface and are simply
butt-jointed together. Covers 600 mm wide and above have dimples Closed and ventilated covers
formed in the top surface to increase their rigidity, and are overlapped Fit the correct size cover clips to the tray in the positions shown below
and bolted together. Each wide straight cover has an overlap tongue Covers with slots
formed at one end to make joining simple Place the cover on to the clips with the slots in the cover aligned with
Covers for MRF, SRF, XRF and SS straight lengths are 3 m long with six the tapped holes in the clips and secure with the fasteners supplied
cover clips and associated fasteners Covers without slots
■ Installation (typical) Place the cover on to the clips and mark the positions of the fixing
holes. Remove the cover and drill the holes. Refit the cover and secure
Closed cover installations with the fasteners supplied
Supplied singly with fasteners and brackets. Covers 600 mm and
above are overlap jointed and dimpled for rigidity
SS light duty tray closed covers are only available in widths 300 mm Closed
and above Cover
cover
Cat. No. SSCC W F Cat. No. XRFCC W F Tray
Clip
100 to 450 wide
Ventilated
cover
Cover
Clip
Tray
600 wide and above :

50 wide
overlap tongue and
dimpled for rigidity Cover clip positions
Cat. No. MRFCC W F 3 m lengths only

Cat. No. SRFCC W F
(MRFCC similar) Most tray covers have slots in the top surface which determine the
positions of the cover clips
Straight ventilated cover installations For SS 50 to 150 wide covers which do not have slots, holes must be
Supplied singly with fasteners. 3 m lengths drilled in the covers on site after the clips have been fitted to the tray
Covers 600 mm and above are overlap jointed and dimpled for rigidity Fasteners for cover clips (included)
SS ventilated covers are only available in widths 75 mm and above Overlap joint (2 fasteners per joint on widths 600 and above)
For G, D and
Cat. No. SRFCV W F
PG finish For S finish
(MRFCV similar)
75 to 450 wide C E
A Cover
B Tray
A D A D C M6 x 12 roofing bolt
B B D Cover clip (closed or
ventilated)
C E E M6 x 12 panhead screw
50 wide
600 wide and above :
overlap tongue and
dimpled for rigidity
Fastener finishes
For covers with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised or zinc
Cat. No. MRFCV coated, except for retaining nut which is ‘Dacromet’ coated. For covers
(SSCV similar) with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel, except for retaining nut
which is ‘Xylan’ coated. For covers with E finish, the choice of material
for fasteners will depend on the installation environment. For further
Cat. No. SSCV W F
Tray range
SS MRF SRF XRF
Closed covers SSCCWF MRFCCWF SRFCCWF XRFCCWF
Cat. Nos.
Ventilated covers SSCVWF MRFCVWF SRFCVWF –
following options :
S (stainless steel), E (powder coated) All dimensions (mm) are nominal
97
12
18
25
covers for straight lengths (continued)
50 80
■ Assembly (continued) ■ Dimensions and weights

Joining covers Covers
For covers 600 mm wide and above with overlap joints fit the first cover 50 tray width Cover
width
as above. Fit U-shaped retaining nuts over the holes in the overlap 75 to 450
tongue. Fit the second cover in the same way as the first, ensuring that tray width
B
the straight (butt) end overlaps the tongue on the first cover Cover
width Six 33 x 8 slots
Insert fasteners through the slots in the end of the second cover into A (except for SS tray
75-150 wide)
the U-shaped retaining nuts on the tongue of the first cover and secure
600-900
A tray width
Cover
width
Two 18 x 8
slots
Raised
dimples
for stiffening 461 Six 33 x 8
slots
Two Ø9·5
holes
B
Tray Cover Weight

width width A B (kg)
50 63 3 000 12 2·1
75 88 3 000 12 2·7
Second cover
100 113 3 000 12 3·4
150 163 3 000 12 4·6
225 238 3 000 12 6·6
300 313 3 000 22 13·1
First cover Overlap 'U'-shaped 450 463 3 000 22 18·7
tongue retaining nut
600 613 3 000 22 24·4
750 763 3 000 22 30·1
When a fitting cover has an overlap tongue, it should be fitted on top of
the tongue on the straight cover. Fit U-shaped retaining nuts over the 900 913 3 000 22 35·7
holes in the straight cover tongue. Insert fasteners through the holes in
the fitting cover tongue into the U-shaped retaining nuts and secure Cover clips
21 Tray Tray A
Overlap tongue range width CC CV
10 50-225 – 38·5
SS
300-900 38·5 63·5
Two A
'U'-shaped tapped M6 MRF ALL 38·5 63·5
retaining Fitting holes
Straight 3·0 SRF ALL 63·5 93·5
nut cover
cover
XRF ALL 93·5 –
Fasteners for cover overlap joints (included) 10
Overlap joint (2 fasteners per joint on widths 600 and above)

For G, D and A M6 x 12 roofing bolt 33
20
PG finish For S finish B M6 x 12 panhead screw
C Straight length cover Nom. Weight : 1·0 kg per 20 clips
A B D U-shaped retaining nut
Weights
galvanised G finish
C D C C D C the given weight by the following factors :
Fastener finishes Stainless steel (S) x 0·94
For covers with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised or zinc Pre-galvanised (PG) x 0·96
coated, except for retaining nut which is ‘Dacromet’ coated. For covers Powder coated (E) x 0·97
with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel, except for retaining nut
following options :
98
covers for fittings
Covers are supplied to fit the fittings of all cable tray ranges with the ■ Assembly
exception of MRF and SRF adjustable bends and adjustable risers Cover clip positions
They can be installed either close to the fitting side flanges (closed
cover) or, for all tray ranges except XRF, raised above the flanges Fitting covers are supplied with slots for the cover clip fasteners
providing an air gap (ventilated cover) pre-drilled in the appropriate positions
Covers for fittings up to 450 mm wide are simply butt-joined to straight
length covers. To increase the rigidity of fitting covers of 600 mm width
and above, they are joined to straight covers by being overlapped
and bolted together. To make this simple, fitting covers have extended
overlap tongues with long slots at all joints which are 600 mm wide or
greater
Closed cover installations
Supplied singly with fasteners and brackets. Covers 600 mm and
above are overlap jointed and dimpled for rigidity Flat bend Tee 4 way crosspiece
SS light duty tray closed covers are only available in widths 300 mm cover cover cover
and above
Cat. No. XRFCC W F
Cat. No. SRFCC W F

Up to 450 mm
(MRFCC similar)
Reducer Riser
cover cover
For cover clip dimensions and weights see p. 98
600 wide and above : Closed and ventilated cover assembly
interlock joint for
rigidity.
Cat. No. SCC W F Closed
cover
Cover
Tray
Clip
Up to 450 wide
Ventilated
cover
Cover
Ventilated cover installations Clip

Tray
Cat. No. SSCV W F
To fit covers either as closed or ventilated, place the cover in position

Cat. No. SRFCV W F over the fitting and mark the position of the cover clip slots in the cover
(MRFCV similar) on to the fitting
Remove the cover and fit the appropriate cover clips in the marked
positions on the fitting
600 wide and above:
Fit the cover over the cover clips. Insert fasteners through the covers
interlock joint for rigidity.
Up to 450 wide into the tapped holes in the cover clips. Tighten the fasteners
Overlap tongue Overlap tongue
'U'-shaped 'U'-shaped
retaining Fitting
Straight Fitting retaining Straight
nut cover
cover cover nut cover
Tray range
SS MRF Joining covers
Closed covers SSUTCC W F MRFUTCC W F Wide fitting covers (600 mm or over) with overlap tongues on the
Cat. Nos. joining faces can be joined to either end of a straight length cover
Ventilated covers SSUTCV W F MRFUTCV W F To join a wide fitting cover to a straight cover with an overlap tongue,
SRF XRF push ‘U’-shaped retaining nuts over the holes in the straight cover
Closed covers SRFUTCC W F XRFUTCC W F tongue. Fit the fitting cover with its tongue overlapping the straight
Cat. Nos. cover tongue. Insert fasteners through the holes in the fitting cover
Ventilated covers SRFUTCV W F XRFUTCV W F tongue and into the retaining nuts. Tighten the fasteners
The Cat. Nos. should be completed with the inclusion of the fitting To join a wide fitting cover to a straight cover which has a straight
reference where indicated (butt) end, push ‘U’-shaped retaining nuts over the holes in the fitting
Example : cover overlap tongue. Fit the fitting cover with its overlap tongue
under the end of the straight cover. Insert fasteners through the slots
A closed cover for an SRF unequal tee, in the end of the straight cover and into the retaining nuts. Tighten the
SRFUTCC width 1 width 2 finish fasteners
following options :
99
covers for fittings (continued)
■ Assembly (continued) ■ Dimensions and weights

For information on dimensions and weights for specific fitting covers,
Fasteners (included)
contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
2 fasteners per clip
For G, D and
PG finish For S finish
C E
A D A D
B B
C E
A Cover
B Tray
Overlap joint (2 fasteners per joint C M6 x 12 roofing bolt
on widths 600 and above) D Cover clip (closed or
For G, D and
ventilated)
PG finish For S finish E M6 x 12 panhead screw
A B
C D C C D C
Fastener finishes
For covers with G, D and PG finishes, fasteners are galvanised or zinc
coated, except for retaining nut which is ‘Dacromet’ coated. For covers
with S finish, fasteners are stainless steel, except for retaining nut
following options :
100
fishplates
Fishplates are designed for use when joining larger widths of MRF ■ Assembly (continued)
and SRF cable tray and all widths of SS cable tray which have been Fixing positions
cut to length
They fit across the underside of the tray joint to provide added strength XRF
and increase the safe working load. They also greatly enhance the Cat. No. F Cat. No. MF Cat. No. WF
lateral rigidity of the joint and prevent unevenness in the bed between on 225 mm on 300 mm on 450 mm
adjacent trays. Supplied singly without fasteners
Cat. No. WF
Cat. No. F
SS tray
Cat. No. WF on 600 mm
SRF tray
MRF tray

Cat. No. F B
A
A B
B
Cat. No. MF A
XRF tray
Cat. No. MF
Cat. No. WF
S tray Cat. No. WF
(cut to length)
Weight
Tray range Tray width Cat. No. Cat. Nos. A B (kg)
SS 50–300 FF FF 185 69 0·2

MRF 450–600 WF F MF F 215 200 0·5
SRF 450–900 WF F WF F 365 200 1·4
XRF(1) 225 FF Weights
300 MF F All weights given are in kilograms (kg) and are for hot dip
galvanised G finish
450–600 WF F
(1) Fishplates for XRF tray are only the given weight by the following factors :
required when cable loading is in
excess of 50% of maximum safe Deep galvanised (D) x 1·06
working load Stainless steel (S) x 0·94
■ Assembly
Fixing positions Fasteners (not included)
MRF and SRF For G, D and A M6 x 12 roofing bolt
PG finish B Roofing washer
A C M6 square nut
D Fishplate
E Straight length
B C D E G M6 form A washer
H M6 hexagon nut
SS (cut lengths) For S finish
Fastener finishes
F
For straight lengths with G, D and PG finishes,
fasteners are galvanised or zinc plated. For
straight lengths with S finish, fasteners are
NOTE:
Note
D E
stainless steel
TYPICAL FASTENING
Typical fastener G H
POSITIONS SHOWN.
positions shown. Use
USE SUITABLE
For straight lengths with E finish, the choice
suitable
ALIGNING aligning
HOLES. holes of material for fasteners will depend on the
installation environment. For further information
contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
following options :
S (stainless steel), E (powder coated) ➔ Universal fishplates : see p. 49, 65
101
Swiftrack® channel lengths
single channels – plain and slotted
■ Single channels – plain ■ Single channels – slotted

Single channels are available in standard and light gauge options in Slotted channels are available in standard and light gauge options in
3 and 6 m lengths, supplied singly 3 and 6 m lengths, supplied singly
Standard channels are cold rolled to BS 6946 from 2·5 mm Swiftrack channels conform to BS 6946
pre-galvanised mild steel to BS EN 10346 : 2009 Grade S250GD + Z275
Light gauge channels are cold rolled from 1·5 mm pre-galvanised mild Standard
steel to BS EN 10346 : 2009 Grade S250GD + Z275
All single channels are designed to accept channel nuts, see p. 103
Standard
SC203
SC403
Light gauge
SC200
SC400
Light gauge
SC213 SC413

SC210 SC203 SC213
7·5 7·0
SC410 9·5
20·6 2·5 22·0

1·5
■ Dimensions and weights 41·3 41·0
SC403 SC413
SC200 SC210
7·5 7·0
7·5 7·0
9·5
9·5
2·5 20·6 22·0

1·5 41·3 2·5 1·5 41·0
41·3 41·0
SC400 SC410 41·3 41·0

7·5 7·0
50
9·5
41·3 1·5 41·0

2·5
28 x 13
41·3 41·0
Slot pattern may differ on stainless steel channels
Cat. Nos. Weight (kg)
3 m long 6 m long per m Cat. Nos. Weight (kg)
3 m long 6 m long per m
Standard SC200 3M SC200 6M 1·8
Channel SC400 3M SC400 6M 2·6 Standard SC203 3M SC203 6M 1·8
Channel SC403 3M SC403 6M 2·6
Light gauge SC210 3M SC210 6M 1·2
Channel SC410 3M SC410 6M 1·7 Light gauge SC213 3M SC213 6M 1·2
Channel SC413 3M SC413 6M 1·7
Cat. Nos. given are for standard finish single channel
Cat. Nos. given are for standard finish single channel
For alternative finishes, see opposite For alternative finishes see below
Weights
All weights given are in kilograms (kg) based on nominal thickness and
are for pre-galvanised finish
For weights in alternative finishes contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333

Standard finish :
Pre-galvanised mild steel to BS EN 10346 : 2009 Grade S250GD +
Z275 finish (structural grade)
Alternative finishes :
S Stainless steel to BS EN 10088 : 2005 Grade 1.4404 (equivalent to
S316L31)
102
Swiftrack® channel support system
back-to-back channels, section properties and assembly
■ Back-to-back channels ■ Assembly

Back to back channels are available in 3 and 6 m lengths, supplied Fasteners for single (plain and slotted) and back-to-back channel
singly supplied separately
Back-to-back channels are formed by spot welding together two Fixing brackets to Swiftrack channel
finished single channels at 150 mm centres under controlled conditions Setscrew Standard fasteners for Swiftrack are
to BS EN 1993-1-3 : 2006. All welds and spot welds are suitably high tensile hexagon head setscrews
protected Bracket
to BS 3692-8.8, these being zinc
Channel plated to BS 3382 : Part 2
Channel nut Most standard Swiftrack brackets are
made from 5 or 6 mm gauge steel
SC401 The use of too long a fastener will
9·5 prevent proper tightening because
the bolt end will foul the bottom of
Fixing ladder to Swiftrack the channel before the head tightens
SC401 7·5 channel down on the fitting
Use M10 x 16 mm high When fastening brackets other
82·6 tensile hexagon head than Swiftrack, longer bolts may be
setscrews required if the bracket thickness is
2·5
greater than 8 mm
■ Channel nuts
Channel nuts are for use with all channels and are supplied in packs
41·3 of 100. For maximum load capacity M12 channel nuts should always
be used
Channel nuts conform to BS 6946
Long spring Short spring No spring
Cat. Nos. Weight (kg)
3 m long 6 m long per m
Back-to-back SC401 3M SC401 6M 5·3
channel
Cat. Nos. given are for standard finish back-to-back channel

For alternative finishes see below
Weights
are for pre-galvanised finish ■ Dimensions and weights
For weights in alternative finishes contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333 Long spring Short spring No spring
Standard finish : t t t
Pre-galvanised mild steel to BS EN 10346 : 2009 Grade S250GD + Z275
finish (structural grade)
The safe working loads for zinc plated channel nuts only
Alternative finishes : Slip M10 : 3·0kN M12 : 3·5kN
G Hot dip galvanised after manufacture to BS EN ISO 1461 Pullout M10 : 6·0kN M12 : 8·0kN
S Stainless steel to BS EN 10088 : Grade 1.4404 (equivalent to S316L31) Safety Factor 3 when tested to BS 6946
Torque Tightened to M10 : 5·5 kgf.m (40ftlb)
■ Section properties M12 : 7·0 kgf.m (50ftlb)
Y Y Y Y Thread Depth of Weight (kg)
Y Cat. Nos. size channel t per 100
X X X X
X X X X PN061 M6 41 6·0 3·0
Y Y PN081 M8 41 6·0 3·0
SC200 X X SC203 Long spring
Y X Y PN101 M10 41 8·0 3·7
SC400 SC403
PN121 M12 41 10·0 4·5
Y PN062 M6 21 6·0 2·9
SC401
PN082 M8 21 6·0 2·9
Short spring
Wt A Ixx Ztop Zbottom rxx Iyy ryy PN102 M10 21 8·0 3·6
Cat. Nos. (kg/m) (mm2) (mm4) (min (max (mm) (mm4) (mm)
mm3) mm3) PN122 M12 21 8·0 4·4
SC200 1·8 219 10 779 862 1 330 7·1 49 776 15·1 PN060 M6 ALL 6·0 2·8
SC203 1·6 219 8 960 794 961 6·4 49 318 15·0 PN080 M8 ALL 6·0 2·8
No spring
SC400 2·6 322 67 157 2 857 3 772 14·5 88 783 16·6 PN100 M10 ALL 8·0 3·5
SC401 5·3 645 339 300 8 215 8 215 23·0 177 566 16·6 PN120 M12 ALL 10·0 4·3
SC403 2·4 322 57 221 2 645 2 909 13·3 88 325 16·5 Weights
All weights given are in kilograms (kg) based on nominal thickness,
Wt = weight of section (kg/m) and are for zinc plated finish. For weights in stainless steel finish
A = cross-sectional area (mm2) contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
Ixx = moment of inertia = second moment of area (mm4) Note
Ztop = section modulus about xx axis (mm3) Cat. Nos. given are for standard finish channel nuts, for alternative
finish, see below
Zbottom = section modulus about xx axis (mm3)
rxx = radius of gyration (mm)
Standard finish
Iyy = moment of inertia = second moment of area (mm4)
Zinc plated to BS 3382
ryy = radius of gyration (mm) G Hot dip galvanised after manufacture to BS EN ISO 1461
xx = about xx axis Alternative finish
yy = about yy axis S Stainless steel to BS EN 10088 : Grade 1.4404 (equivalent to S316L31)
103
cantilever arms
Cantilever arms are supplied singly without fasteners ■ Dimensions and weights (continued)
Cantilever arms conform to BS 6946
Cantilever arms, side
Cantilever arms
40
40
130
85
8 mm backplate
8 mm backplate
5 mm for S finish
5 mm for S finish
Unit Arm
Maximum weight length
Unit Arm uniformly Max. point load Cat. Nos. (kg) (mm)
weight length distributed at outer end
Cat. Nos. (kg) (mm) load (kgf)(1) (kgf)(1) SA790 0·64 150
SA750 0·64 150 350(2) (3) 303 SA791 0·85 225
SA751 0·85 225 350(3) 198 SA792 1·03 300
SA752 1·03 300 304 152 SA793 1·42 450
SA753 1·42 450 202 101 SA794 1·81 600
SA754 1·81 600 150 75 SA795 2·20 750
SA755 2·20 750 110 55 SA796 2·60 900
SA757 2·60 900 90 45
Cantilever arms, double channel
Values assume the ladder or other loading medium is rigidly fixed to
cantilever arm
(1) Based upon a load factor of 1·6 for hot dipped galvanised unrestrained condition as
specified in BS EN 1993-1-3 : 2006
(2) Slip limits loading capacity
(3) Load limit is 50% 40
Cantilever arms, universal
175
8 mm backplate
5 mm for S finish
40
Maximum
Unit Arm uniformly Point load
Cat. Nos. (kg) (mm) load (kgf)(1) (kgf)(1)
130
8 mm backplate SA770 1·14 150 700(2)(3) 648
5 mm for S finish SA771 1·68 225 700(2)(3) 420
SA772 2·02 300 650 325
Maximum
Unit Arm uniformly Point load SA773 2·90 450 430 215
Cat. Nos. (kg) (mm) load (kgf)(1) (kgf)(1) SA774 3·78 600 320 160
SA760 0·64 150 700(2) 350 SA775 4·66 750 250 125
SA761 0·85 225 456 228 SA776 5·60 900 200 100
SA762 1·03 300 350 175 Values assume the ladder or other loading medium is rigidly fixed to
SA763 1·42 450 230 115 cantilever arm
(1) Based upon a load factor of 1·6 for hot dipped galvanised unrestrained condition as specified
SA764 1·81 600 170 85 in BS EN 1993-1-3 : 2006
SA765 2·20 750 136 68 (2) Slip limits loading capacity
(3) Load limit is 50%
SA766 2·60 900 110 55
cantilever arm
(1) Based upon a load factor of 1·6 for hot dipped galvanised unrestrained condition as
specified in BS EN 1993-1-3 : 2006
(2) Load limit is 50%
104
cantilever arms (continued)
■ Dimensions and weights (continued) ■ Finishes and standards

Cantilever arm bracket SA 756 The standard finish for all cantilever arms is hot dip galvanised steel to
BS EN ISO 1461
160
40
50
Stainless steel to BS EN 10088 : Grade 1.4404 (equivalent to S316L31)
is also available as an alternative where applicable
■ Assembly
14·5
200 channel
Cantilever arms to Swiftrack channel
Setscrew
Cantilever arm
Bracket
back plate
20 Channel
Channel nut
Horizontal arm section from 3 mm steel only

Weight each (kg) : 1·13
Standard fasteners for Swiftrack are high tensile hexagon head
Weights setscrews to BS 3692-8.8, these being zinc plated to BS 3382: Part 2
All weights given are in kilograms (kg) based on nominal thickness and Most standard Swiftrack brackets are made from 5 or 6 mm gauge steel
standard finish Standard cantilever arm backplates are made from 8 mm gauge steel
Loads The use of too long a fastener will prevent proper tightening because
the bolt end will foul the bottom of the channel before the head tightens
Maximum uniformly distributed loads for individual cantilever arms
down on the fitting
are given with the illustrations in this catalogue. However, should
the loading not be uniform then the safe limit can be obtained by When fastening brackets other than Swiftrack, longer bolts may be
calculating the bending moment produced by the intended loads and required if the bracket thickness is greater than 8 mm
comparing this with the maximum permissible bending moment for the
relevant arm Channel Backplate Recommended
45 kgf.m for SA750 – SA755 and SA757 type thickness fasteners
52 kgf.m for SA760 – SA766 Deep channel 6-8 mm M10 or M12 x 35
SC400 series 5-6 mm M10 or M12 x 25
95 kgf.m for SA770 –- SA776
Shallow channel 7-8 mm M10 or M12 x 25
To obtain the bending moment resulting from any point load, multiply SC200 series 5-6 mm M10 or M12 x 20
the size of the load by its distance from the inner end of the arm
(see illustration A)
If several point loads exist then the total bending moment will be the
sum of the individual bending moment produced by each point load
(see illustration B)
If some part of the total load applied to an arm is uniformly distributed
along a section of the arm only, then this part load can be treated as
a point load acting at the mid-point of that section of arm to which it is
applied (see illustration C)
Illustration A
Load
W kg
xm
Bending moment = Wx kgm

Illustration B
xm W kg
ym V kg
zm U kg
Total bending moment =

(Uz + Vy + Wx) kgm
Illustration C
Uniformly
distributed W
load over
part of arm
Treat as a point load

applied at mid-point

cantilever arm
Stainless steel cantilever arms
Loads are 60% of those given in the tables, except for those marked
(3), in the tables opposite, where the limit is 50%
105
framework brackets
All framework brackets are manufactured to BS 6946 from steel which ■ 90° brackets
complies with BS EN 10025 Grade S275JRC and are supplied singly.
Channel nuts and setscrews are not supplied with brackets, therefore SB500 A
must be ordered separately B
■ Dimensions and weights 47
Made from 5 or 6 mm thick steel unless otherwise stated 47

Brackets are 40 mm wide and have 14 mm diameter holes to accept
M12 (or smaller) setscrews Maximum load on each bracket with both
ends supported : A = 350kgf. B = 174kgf
All bend radii are 5 mm unless otherwise stated
Unit weight (kg) : 0·125
Weights
are for hot dip galvanised finish. For weights in stainless steel finish SB501 A
contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333 42
Loads
All loads are for hot dip galvanised brackets fixed with M12 setscrews 52
and M12 zinc plated channel nuts. Loads for stainless steel brackets
are available on request - contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333 Maximum load on each bracket :
Minimum Yield Stress of material is 275 N/mm2 A = 180kgf
Only M10 or M12 channel nuts and bolts should be used for the Unit weight (kg) : 0·125
attachment of load-bearing brackets
In most cases the mode of failure will be slippage of the bracket along SB502 A
the channel. However there are few channel/bracket combinations 42
where the maximum load is dependant upon the strength of the
bracket itself
98
The standard finish for all framework brackets and beam clamps is hot
dip galvanised steel to BS EN ISO 1461 Maximum load on each bracket :
Stainless steel to BS EN 10088 : Grade 1.4404 (equivalent to S316L31) A = 230kgf
is also available as an alternative where applicable. To order stainless Unit weight (kg) : 0·191
steel finish add S to the end of the standard catalogue number
For example : SB500S SB503 A
■ Assembly
Fixing brackets to Swiftrack channel
86
Setscrew Maximum load on each bracket with both
Bracket 53 ends supported : A = 120kgf
Channel Unit weight (kg) : 0·191
Channel nut
SB504
A
Standard fasteners for Swiftrack are high tensile hexagon head

setscrews to BS 3692-8.8, these being zinc plated to BS 3382 : Part 2
87
The use of too long a fastener will prevent proper tightening because
the bolt end will foul the bottom of the channel before the head tightens
down on the fitting 98
Maximum load on each bracket :
When fastening brackets other than Swiftrack, longer bolts may be A = 120kgf
required if the bracket thickness is greater than 8 mm Unit weight (kg) : 0·257
For channel nuts, see p. 103
SB505
Channel Backplate Recommended A
type thickness fasteners(1)
Deep channel 6 mm and 8 mm M10 or M12 x 35 mm(2) 53
SC400 series 5 mm and 6 mm M10 or M12 x 20 mm
Shallow channel 7 mm and 8 mm M10 or M12 x 25 mm(2)
131
(1) The use of too long a fastener will prevent proper tightening because the bolt end will foul
the bottom of the channel before the head tightens down on the fitting
(2) When fastener brackets other than Swiftrack, longer bolts may be required if the bracket
thickness is greater than 8 mm

A = 300kgf
106
■ 90° brackets (continued) ■ Square plates and splice plates

SB550 A Square plates
43 Unit
90 40
weight
50 Cat. Nos. Fasteners (kg) 40
96
SB50606 M6 0·063
SB50608 M8 0·062
SB50610 M10 0·061
45 SB50612 M12 0·058
A = 600kgf Use as location plate when attaching any special fitment which will not
20 Unit weight (kg) : 0·359 sit across both channel sides
Splice plates
SB551 A Holes spaced at 45 mm centres
43
90 SB507 20
SB508 20
50
85 130
40 40
142
20
20
45
Unit weight (kg) : 0·125 Unit weight (kg) : 0·191
45
A = 600kgf
20 Unit weight (kg) : 0·516
SB509 SB510
20
20
SB552 A 40 175
45 40 220
130
90
20
94
20

45
Maximum load on each bracket : ■ U and Z brackets
A = 700kgf. 5mm thick.
20 Unit weight (kg) : 0·488 U bracket
SB514 SB515
SB556 141 141
A
88
90
96
54
54
25
Maximum load on each bracket with 48
both ends supported : A = 260kgf Unit weight (kg) : 0·243 Hole on one side of bracket only
Z bracket
SB511 47·5 SB513 46
47
26
47
107
■ Angle brackets ■ Joining brackets and channels

Obtuse angle brackets Jointing bracket 41
Unit
SB518
weight
Cat. Nos. Angle (kg)
90 40
SB520 15 0·197
40
ϑ SB524 45 0·197
SB526 60 0·197 85
95 47
SB528 75 0·197
Acute angle brackets

Jointing channel
Unit SB651 SB650
A weight
Cat. Nos. Angle (mm) (kg)
SB532 45 65 0·237
ϑ
SB534 60 46 0·197 175
90 SB536 75 46 0·197 175
23
A 45
For SC400 channel. 45 mm deep For SC200 channel. 23 mm deep

■ T plates and brackets Unit weight (kg) : 0·85 Unit weight (kg) : 0·55
■ L brackets
T plate
SB554 SB555 L bracket

80
SB600
40
90
130
50
80
50
50 Unit weight (kg) : 0·163
90
90
Left hand Right hand
Unit weight (kg) : 0·359 Unit weight (kg) : 0.284
L corner bracket L corner bracket
T bracket 90° T bracket SB602 SB601
SB603 SB606 90
90
120
40
40
80
140
51
40 Not available in S finish Not available in S finish
Not available in S finish
Cross plate 45° T bracket

SB603+ SB607
48
48
45
45∞
140
48
138

Not available in S finish Not available in S finish
108
framework brackets (continued) and beam clamps
■ Wing brackets and shelf brackets ■ Beam clamps

2 lug wing bracket 3 lug wing bracket Beam clamps are supplied singly
SB700 SB701 53 Nut, bolts, cone point screws and U bolts where shown are included
Beam clamps conform to BS 6946
Dimensions and weights
86 All weights given are in kilograms (kg) based on nominal thickness and
86
are for hot dip galvanised finish unless otherwise stated. For weights in
stainless steel finish contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
Beam clamp Beam clamp

148·5 149 SC850 *28 30 SC851 *25 40
*65
*25
48
Angled wing bracket Shelf bracket 6 mm 6 mm 47
SB707 48 SB703 Maximum load : 400kgf/pair Maximum load : 200kgf
Use in pairs Unit weight (kg) : 0·208
Unit weight (kg) : 0.117
48 87
98 Window Window beam clamp

beam clamp SC852/41
SC852/21 *41 *41
Unit weight (kg) : 0·250 Gusset only, 3 mm thick 80 80
Not available in S finish Unit weight (kg) : 0·369 *65 *87
■ Base plates and gusseted brackets

*22 *22
Single channel Double channel 6 mm 6 mm
base plate base plate For 21 mm channel For 41 mm channel and
SB704 SB705 Maximum load : 475kgf/pair 21 mm back-to-back channels
40 40 Use in pairs Maximum load : 475kgf/pair
Unit weight (kg) : 0·37 Use in pairs
95
140
80 189 80
Distance between hole centres : Distance between hole centres : Window beam clamp Beam clamp
100 mm 149 mm SC852/82 SC853
Unit weight (kg) : 0·848 *41 *47
80 80
*13
*125
Single channel gusseted Double channel gusseted
bracket bracket
110°
SB702 SB706 *22
20 20
6 mm Maximum load : 900kgf/pair
For 41 mm Use in pairs
55 55 175 Unit weight (kg) : 0·30
175 back-to-back channels.
55
Maximum load : 375kgf/pair
55
Use in pairs
Outer Outer Unit weight (kg) : 0·56
holes holes
Ø20 Ø20
43 84
252 293
45 63 45 63
20 20 Beam Clamp
Unit weight (kg) : 1·848 Unit weight (kg) : 2·118 SC854 *25
40
*16
6 mm *37
Maximum load : 350kgf/pair
Use in pairs
(*) Inside dimensions (mm)
109
beam clamps, pipe clamps and channel accessories
■ Beam clamps (continued) ■ Channel accessories

Beam clamp Toe beam clamp Channel accessories conform to BS 6946
SC855 *47 SC856
80 Dimensions and weights
*62
*13
*12 stainless steel finish contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
Channel end caps

Cat. Nos. Finish
SC950B black
Maximum load : 900kgf/pair 6 mm SC950W white
Use in pairs Maximum load : 400kgf/pair
Unit weight (kg) : 0·308 Use in pairs
Requires 2 setscrews and channel
nuts for fixing (not included) For SC400, SC401 and SC403 channels
Unit weight (kg) : 0·179 Supplied in packs of 100
Weight per 100 (kg): 0·9
Beam Clamp Beam Clamp
ZC1 FL2
Channel end caps
Cat. Nos. Finish
SC951B black
19 SC951W white
Maximum load : 25kg Maximum load : 240kg For SC200, SC201 and SC203 channels
Use M10 Rod Use M10 Rod Supplied in packs of 100
Zinc plated to BS 3382: Part 2 Zinc plated to BS 3382 : Part 2 Weight per 100 (kg) : 0·9
Unit weight (kg) : 0·10 Not available in S finish
■ Pipe clamps
Closure strips
Cat. Nos. Finish
SC952 plastic
Supplied singly
SC953 metal
Nuts and bolts where shown are included
Pipe clamps conform to BS 6946
Dimensions and weights

3000
stainless steel finish contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333 Standard length 3 metres
SP960 - SP973 Unit weight (kg) : SC952 : 0·4
Pipe Unit
SC953 : 1·0
diameter weight
Cat. Nos. (mm) (kg)
SP960 10-14 0·06
The standard finish for pipe clamps is pre-galvanised steel to
SP964 17-22 0·08 BS EN 10327 – grade DX51D and Z275 finish
SP965 22-26 0·09 Stainless steel to BS EN 10088 : Grade 1.4404 (equivalent to S316L31)
SP968 25-36 0·10 is also available as an alternative
SP969 32-42 0·11
SP972 42-59 0·13
SP973 54-65 0·15
SP975 - SP976
Pipe Unit
diameter weight
Cat. Nos. (mm) (kg)
SP975 62-71 0·16
SP976 73-83 0·17
110
Ceiling support system
heavy duty
The dedicated ceiling support system allows for a flexible, multi-tiered ■ Ceiling bracket
approach for single or double sided loads with a maximum cantilever 60 47
arm width of 700 mm to accept Swifts cable trays up to 600 mm wide,
either lidded or unlidded 140 23
Ceiling fixings are not included Ceiling bracket
Weight
Cantilever arms will accept the following maximum width items :
110
Cat. No. (kg)
Width 8766550 0·500
Cat. Nos. (mm) Ø 14
557233 200 150 mm unlidded tray

557243 300 150 mm lidded or unlidded tray 100
557253 400 300 mm lidded or unlidded tray

557263 500 450 mm unlidded tray ■ End plate profile
557273 600 450 mm lidded tray 40 x 14
557383 700 600 mm lidded or unlidded tray
80
■ Ceiling supports
End plate profile
135 Weight
Cat. No. (kg)
200
10 8766560 0·970
10
100
25 x 13 25 x 13
14 x 40 14 x 28
20
40
50
■ Profile connector
40
80
L
60
135
35
40 x 11
200 51
Profile connector
18 x 11 Weight
Cat. No. (kg)
200
8766570 0·418
Ceiling supports
Weight
Cat. Nos. (kg)
8766502 1·318
8766503 1·630 ■ Cantilever arms
8766504 1·942 45
8766505 2·254 45
18·5
8766506 2·566 B + 19 18·5 63
90 13 x 20
39 63 117
8766507 2·878 A 13 x 20 A
8766508 3·190
45
8766509 3·502
32 x 7 18·5
8766510 3·814 63
25 90 13 x 20
8766511 4·126 A
50
8766512 4·438
8766513 4·750 100 – 400 back plate = 4 mm
8766514 5·062 500 – 700 back plate = 6 mm
8766515 5·374 Cantilever arms
Weight A B
8766516 5·686 Cat. Nos. (kg) (mm) (mm)
8766518 6·310 557233 0·335 103 200
8766520 6·934 557243 0·464 111 300
■ Extension profiles
557253 0·637 121 400
557263 0·782 128 500
1·110 138 600
20
557273
40
557383 1·438 146 700

Extension profiles
■ Finish
60
Weight
Cat. Nos. (kg)
8766530 9·600 G S235J hot dip galvanised steel to BS EN ISO 1461

8766545 14·400
For further technical information,
please contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
50
40 x 11
111
DESIGN NOTES
IN THIS SECTION
Selecting the right finish
Preventing corrosion
- Chemical corrosion 114
- Electrochemical corrosion 114
- Galvanic Series 115
- The merits of Zinc 116-117
- Common corrosion situations 118
Suitability of finishes
- Metallic finishes 118-119
- Organic finishes 118-119
Finishes
British standards 120
Hot dip galvanised (G) 121
Deep galvanised (D) 121
Pre-galvanised (PG) 122
Stainless steel (S) 122
Powder coated (E) 123
Installation of services
Cable tray systems
- Design factors to consider 124-129
- Recommended support locations 127-128
- Loading graphs 130-131
Structural support characteristics
Structural characteristics
- Cable tray 132
- Beams 132-133
- Columns 133
- Deflection 133
Designing support systems
- Ceiling to floor applications 134
- Ceiling mounted applications 135
- Wall mounted applications 135
- Floor mounted applications 135
Swiftrack channel support
- Channels 136
- Channel nuts 136
- Framework brackets 136
- Fasteners 136
- Cantilever arms 137
- Maximum safe recommended loadings 137
- Channels used as beams 138
- Channels used as columns 138
- Fully restrained and unrestrained loads 138
- Beam loads 139
Packaging, handling, storage and safety
Export packaging 140
Handling and storage 141
Safety during installation phase 141
Relevant British, European and
International Standards 142-143
113
IN THIS SECTION...
Preventing corrosion Suitability of finishes
1. Chemical corrosion 1. Metallic finishes
Selecting the 2. Electrochemical corrosion

3. Galvanic Series
4. The merits of Zinc
2. Organic finishes
right finish 5. Common corrosion

situations
Preventing corrosion
In planning any cabling or support installation the choice of 1 Chemical corrosion
an appropriate corrosion resistant finish is always a key issue
Few metals will suffer corrosion damage in a dry, unpolluted
at the specification stage, ranking alongside installation time
atmosphere at a normal ambient temperature. Unfortunately
and load carrying ability. However, unlike these other factors,
such environments are exceptional and atmospheric pollutants
which are only of importance during the installation phase, the
are likely to be present to some degree in most situations where
correct choice of finish has long term implications and is crucial
support systems will be installed. Thus mild chemical corrosion
for ensuring the longevity (and
is normal in almost all situations and useful information on the
aesthetics) of the complete
types of material or choices of finish which will inhibit and control
installation in order to meet with
this are given within the following pages.
the client’s expectations.
Any support installation which will be situated in an area where
Since future maintenance of
higher concentrations of chemicals exist must receive more
any support system is virtually
detailed consideration in order to select a finish which provides
impossible, it is vital that the
the best combination of initial cost and expected life. To assist
finish specified for the equipment
in this, tables on page 119, give guidance on the suitability of
is capable of providing lifetime
the standard materials and finishes used for support systems in
protection from corrosion within
the presence of those chemicals most commonly found within
the intended environment -
industry. More detailed information is available upon request,
ideally with some margin of
safety. please contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333.
The following pages give 2 Electrochemical corrosion
information on how corrosion When two dissimilar metals are in contact and become damp it
occurs and supporting is possible for corrosion to be induced in one of the metals. Such
technical data on the standard corrosion may progress rapidly and cause considerable damage
construction materials and so it is important to consider and, if necessary, take steps to
surface finishes available eliminate this process occurring.
within each range of products Electrochemical (or electrolytic) corrosion takes place because
supplied by Legrand. Contact our the two different metals each behave as electrodes and the
technical team on +44 (0) 845 605 moisture as the electrolyte in a simple battery; as with any battery
4333 for further information. the resulting flow of current will cause corrosion of the anode.
Corrosion occurs on all metals The likely effects of this reaction can be predicted using the
to some extent. With some, such Galvanic Series.
as stainless steel, its effects
are usually only slight but even
then the presence of certain
chemicals or physical contact with other metals may cause rapid
corrosion. It is therefore important to consider every aspect of
the environment surrounding any intended installation in order
to choose a material or finish which will minimise the risk of
damage to the support system through the effects of corrosion.
114
3 Galvanic Series Environment Maximum Potential Difference
Even when two dissimilar metals are in moist contact,
Marine and outdoor 0·3 volts
electrochemical corrosion need not necessarily take place. Its
likelihood depends upon the potential difference between the two Indoor 0·5 volts
metals; this can be obtained by taking their respective values from Indoor, hermetically No restriction(1)
the chart below and subtracting one from the other. sealed (dry)
When the potential difference is less than the values given in the
(1) With no moisture to act as the electrolyte no electrochemical corrosion can take place
table to the right corrosion is unlikely to occur.
If corrosion does take place the metal which is higher in the
Series (to the right) will be corroded in preference to that which is
lower in the Series (to the left).
Galvanic Series chart
ste 57)
En
e l)
l p 70 (
9
er)
ed
nic 80,
lat
pp
er)
CH LES on s 0·75 (18/2 tc.)
(on EEL
(on S S
co
90
el)
p
ke
e
ed
7
co
µm ), B
61
14
µm ST
G, UM nze
ste
LV 80/2 G (o ING 147

YS
r)
lat
ON
14
04
ve
on
IS ) PL stee , BS
ST R a ST 845 1224
GN AS ste EN l)
M
CA NIU UMI Y C LLO

MI bro
rp
ee
sil
oy S 10
ST 70,
(
LL M, T IR
ES TIN el) ISO

IU
G
ER silve
G L, B n st
S
s ( 8)
%
OM
RE D A
CA 14
IN
PL HR ss,
BS
DM M A NIU AS
RO S H loy 18/
,B
1/2
PL D S TIN l)
RA 117 DE 19
AT
(o
TIN D ST ATI CHR
OY BS
a
HT D G LA
(on
0
CO ES R, B teel)
d i LOY
CH LES ts al IC (
br
(2-
2
s
PL
S
e)
13
-C
SO BS
O
G
hit
n
R
T
all
s
2% l)
NE M P OW
M G AL
UN
G,
IN
UM
NI
RO S, 1 tee
ap
LD
ER S,
A
S
ts
N
N
o
AT
LV
C
E
LE ILV DER
(gr
MA E-C (on
PE
L
ZIN AT TE
SO G (
IN
TIN TI
GO
GA C ( TIN
H
SI
PL
A
AT
UG AN
an
IG
ST TY
ON
IN
0
U
NL DE
L
L
N LA
L
D
AL
N G(
-LE EE
PP S A
+0·2
M
PL
AD SO
nd
IN
AN
IN
RO EL
RB
E
L
LV PLA
P
IU
IU
MI UM
TIN IUM
TIN IU
TIN IU
NI UM
OD
E
LE AD
CA
DU BS
ER
AN
A
M
DI
-S
EL
ER
L
RH
I
I
PL
LV
UM
AN
/ZI
+0·2
AD
LD
CK
C
AI
AI
AI
SI
ZIN
TIT
AL
ST
ST
W
SI
0
POTENTIAL DIFFERENCE (VOLTS)
POTENTIAL DIFFERENCE (VOLTS)

0
-0·2
-0·2
-0·4
-0·4
-0·6
-0·6
-0·8
-0·8
-1·0
-1·0
Lower in Higher in -1·2
Series Series
-1·2
-1·4
-1·4
-1·6
-1·6
The Galvanic Series illustrates the potential difference between a section of metal and a Calomel electrode when both are immersed in
sea water at 25°C. This chart contains most commonly used engineering or plating metals.
If corrosion does take place the metal which is higher in the series (to the right) will be corroded in preference to that which is lower in
the series (to the left).
If the affected metal has a small surface area in relation to

its counterpart it will be corroded very aggressively and any
sacrificial protection it provides may be short-lived. If on the other
hand it has a large surface area in comparison to its less reactive
counterpart, some minor corrosion may take place at points of
contact but the process is likely to reach equilibrium rapidly so
that any further reaction is insignificant.
If from consideration of this Series excessive corrosion does
appear likely then the risk can be largely eliminated by insulating
the dissimilar metals from one another, breaking the electrical
path between them. A layer of paint on either surface is usually
sufficient to achieve this.
115
4 The merits of Zinc The Galvanizers Association has undertaken significant research
based upon the positioning of reference canisters placed
The Galvanic Series does show why zinc is such a useful corrosion
throughout the UK and the Republic of Ireland to establish
resistant coating for mild steel.
background corrosion rates for 10 km square grids which has
Firstly, it forms an impervious zinc barrier around the steel, resulted in the formation of The Zinc Millennium Map.
coating it with a metal whose own rate of chemical corrosion is
For most sites on this map an average hot dip galvanised coating
both low and predictable in most situations.
will last between 40 to 100 years, highlighting the potential
Secondly, if the coating is damaged at any point (e.g. at a cut edge) for significant financial savings when galvanising is specified.
the zinc surrounding the damaged area becomes the anode of the However, with the correct use of the map specific locations can be
electrolytic cell and is sacrificially corroded away very slowly in analysed for average zinc corrosion rates per year.
preference to the underlying steel. This ensures the strength of
the steel structure remains unaffected.
The Zinc Millennium Map
Because zinc appears near the top of the Galvanic Series it will
The definitive geographical guide to the different corrosion levels
act as a sacrificial anode in relation to most other metals; thus its
of galvanised steel products used in the construction industry.
relatively low cost and the ease with which it can be applied as a
galvanised coating on steel means that it continues to be the most Corrosion rate key 1 2 3 4 5
commonly specified protective finish for support systems.
Average Corrosion rate (μm/year) 0·5 1 1·5 2 2·5
Life expectancy of zinc coatings Average life of 85μm galvanised 187 85 57 43 34
The resistance of galvanising to atmospheric corrosion depends coating (years)
on a protective film which forms on the surface of the zinc. When
the steel is withdrawn from the galvanising bath the zinc has Please note this is an average background corrosion rate for zinc.
a clean, bright, shiny surface. Over time the appearance will For further information please contact the Galvanizers Association.
change to a dull grey patina as the surface reacts with oxygen,
water and carbon dioxide in the atmosphere. A complex but
tough, stable and protective layer is formed which adheres to the
zinc. Contaminants in the atmosphere affect the nature of this
protective film.
The most significant contaminant which will accelerate the
corrosion rate of zinc is sulphur dioxide (S02) and it is the
presence of S02 which largely controls the atmospheric corrosion
of zinc.
BS EN ISO 14713 general corrosion effects and life expectancy for zinc coated products
Corrosivity Corrosion Environment - Environment - Pollution Zinc coating Coating life years
category rate of interior exterior level thickness 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
C1 < 0.1 Warm, dry, no 0 PG (Z275) = 19 > 100
Very low pollution microns
G = 55 microns > 100
D = 110 > 100
microns
C2 0.1 to 0.7 Unheated, low Temperate, rural, <5 PG (Z275) = 19 > 100
Low condensation, low urban with low microns
pollution pollution G = 55 microns > 100
D = 110 > 100
microns
C3 0.7 to 2 Moderate Temperate, urban 5 to 30 PG (Z275) = 19
Medium condensation & with medium microns
pollution pollution, mild G = 55 microns
eg food coastal D = 110 > 100
processing plants microns
C4 2 to 4 High Temperate, urban 30 to 90 PG (Z275) = 19
High condensation, with high microns
high pollution pollution, G = 55 microns
eg chemical or industrial, coastal D = 110
industrial plants, microns
C5 4 to 8 Very high Temperate, very 90 to 250 PG (Z275) = 19
Very high condensation & high pollution, microns
industrial industrial & high G = 55 microns
pollution, salinity coastal D = 110
eg mines microns
CX 8 to 25 Permanent Very high >250 PG (Z275) = 19
Extreme condensation & pollution, extreme microns
high pollution industrial, coastal G = 55 microns
& offshore with D = 110
occasional salt microns
116
The Zinc Millennium Map
is supplied courtesy of
The Galvanizers
Association.
Further information is
available at
www.galvanizing.org.uk
117
5 Common corrosion situations
Finally, the most common occurrences of contact between Suitability of finishes
dissimilar metals within support systems are :
a. Where stainless steel components are being fixed to a carbon 1 Metallic finishes
steel structure
The table on the following page outlines the suitability of metallic
b. Where galvanised or zinc plated components are being fixed finishes under a variety of conditions. The following notes apply to
onto a stainless steel support system the data :
c. Where copper components (e.g. copper tubing or MICC cable) 1. Hard water promotes the formation of a stable protective film
are being installed onto a galvanised steel support system on a hot dip galvanised coating.
In relation to these three sets of conditions the following 2. Salt spray testing should not be used on galvanised coatings;
comments apply : the data provided by such accelerated weathering tests is
(i) Stainless steel – mild steel misleading and inaccurate on this finish since the formation of
This situation has been the subject of much consideration and the protective film (patina) is prevented from forming under the
debate over recent years, particularly in the offshore energy artificial conditions.
industry. 3. No information is available on the resistance of galvanised
Whilst Legrand can supply kits of components (including, coatings to contact with this type of oil. However, in general terms
according to the circumstances, insulating pads, sleeves for galvanised coatings are resistant to oil-based products.
fasteners or insulating coatings) the latest metallurgical advice 4. Resistant provided that the oil is stable, free from acidity and of
from both the manufacturers of stainless steel and other bodies mineral origin.
is that these metals are sufficiently close together in the Galvanic 5. Under immersed conditions contact with this chemical is not
Series for any electrolytic effects to be ignored in normal offshore recommended and over-coating with a paint or powder system is
environments. One exception is when a small mild steel (or necessary. When this chemical is an airborne aerosol the coating
galvanised mild steel) component is in direct contact with a large performance depends on various factors specific to the particular
mass of stainless steel. application. Corrosion rates will be high and if condensation is
It is now accepted that the application of a simple paint coating to likely to be heavy and its pH value is outside the range pH5 -
one of the juxtaposed surfaces will provide sufficient insulation to pH12.5 then overpainting or coating of the galvanising is normally
break the electrical circuit, effectively eliminating any problems. recommended.
(ii) Small galvanised components on stainless steel If the galvanised surface is frequently washed by fresh water and
The zinc coating will provide very limited protection to its allowed to periodically dry out then the level of corrosion will be
underlying steel because of the rapidity with which it will erode less severe.
away. Once exposed the base steel (often a fastener) will be 2 Organic finishes
aggressively corroded causing unsightly staining of the stainless Refer to the table on the following page for information on the
steel and premature failure to the component. In the case of suitability of organic finishes under a variety of conditions.
fasteners such failure could be catastrophic to the installation so
appropriate stainless steel fasteners should always be used with a
stainless steel support system.
(iii) Copper on zinc
If copper is laid directly onto a galvanised surface the zinc will
rapidly erode. Thus MICC cable should always have an insulating
sheath if it is to be installed on galvanised cable tray.
118
Suitability of metallic finishes
Stainless steel Stainless steel Pre-galvanised Hot dip Deep Aluminium
316 304 steel galvanised galvanised
steel steel
✓ ✓ ✕ ✓ see note (1) ✓ see note (1)
ENVIRONMENTS
Fresh water
Salt spray B177 Test ✓ ✓ ✕ ✓ see note (2) ✓ see note (2) ✓
✓ ✕ ✕ ✓ ✓
Polluted marine
environment Ο
Acetone ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Petroleum (gasoline) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
SOLVENTS
Trichloroethylene ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Glycerine ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Methyl chloride ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Ο
Linseed oil ✓ ✓ Ο see note (3) Ο see note (3) Ο see note (3)
✓ ✓
OILS
Penetrating oil Ο see note (3) Ο see note (3) Ο see note (3)
Lubricating oil ✓ ✓ Ο see note (5) Ο see note (4) Ο see note (4)
10% Sulphuric acid ✕ ✕ Ο see note (5) Ο see note (5) Ο see note (5) ✕
Conc. Sulphuric acid ✓ ✕ at high temp. ✓ ✕ at high temp. Ο see note (5) Ο see note (5) Ο see note (5) ✓ ✕ above 40°C.
10% Hydrochloric acid ✕ ✕ Ο see note (5) Ο see note (5) Ο see note (5) ✕
10% Nitric acid ✓ ✓ Ο see note (5) Ο see note (5) Ο see note (5) ✓
✓ ✕ ✕
ACIDS
50% Phosphoric acid Ο see note (5) Ο see note (5) Ο see note (5)
10% Acetic acid ✓ ✓ Ο see note (5) Ο see note (5) Ο see note (5)
5% Tartaric acid ✓ Ο Ο see note (5) Ο see note (5) Ο see note (5) ✕
5% Citric acid ✓ ✓ ✕ at high temp. Ο see note (5) Ο see note (5) Ο see note (5) ✕
10% Lactic acid ✓ ✕ Ο see note (5) Ο see note (5) Ο see note (5)
✓ ✕
10% Caustic soda
ALKALINES
sodium hydroxide Ο see note (5) Ο see note (5) Ο see note (5)
25% Caustic soda ✓ ✕ Ο see note (5) Ο see note (5) Ο see note (5) ✕
10% Ammonia Ο Ο Ο see note (5) Ο see note (5) Ο see note (5)
KEY : ✓ Probably suitable ● ✕ Probably unsuitable ● Ο Investigate if no alternative For notes (1) to (5) see left hand page
Suitability of organic finishes

Epoxy powder Polyester epoxy PVC coating GRP polyester GRP vinylester PVC
mix coating
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ENVIRONMENTS
Fresh water
Salt spray B177 Test ✓ ✓ 500 hours ✓ 500 hours Ο Ο ✓
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✓ ✕
Polluted marine
environment
Acetone ✕ ✓ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Petroleum (gasoline) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✕ above 75°C. ✓ ✕ above 60°C. ✓ ✓ ✕ above 75°C.
SOLVENTS
Trichloroethylene ✕ ✓ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Glycerine ✓ ✓ ✓ ✕ above 75°C. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✕ above 75°C.
Methyl chloride ✕ ✓ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Linseed oil ✓ ✓ ✓ ✕ above 75°C. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✕ above 75°C.
✓ ✓ ✓ ✕ above 75°C. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✕ above 75°C.
OILS
Penetrating oil
Lubricating oil ✓ ✓ ✓ ✕ above 60°C. ✓
10% Sulphuric acid ✓ ✓ ✓ ✕ above 75°C. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✕ above 75°C.
Conc. Sulphuric acid ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✓ ✕
10% Hydrochloric acid ✓ ✓ ✓ ✕ above 30°C. ✓ ✕ above 60°C. ✓ ✓ ✕ above 30°C.
10% Nitric acid ✕ ✓ ✕ above 20°C. ✓ ✕ above 30°C. ✕ ✓ ✕ above 50°C.
✓ ✓ ✓ ✕ at high temp. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✕ above 75°C.
ACIDS
50% Phosphoric acid

10% Acetic acid ✓ ✓ ✕ ✓ ✓
5% Tartaric acid ✓ ✓ ✓ ✕ above 75°C. ✓ ✓ ✕
5% Citric acid ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✕ above 75°C.
10% Lactic acid ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✕ above 60°C. ✓ ✓ ✕ above 75°C.
✓ ✓ ✓ ✕ ✓ ✓ ✕ above 75°C.
10% Caustic soda
ALKALINES
sodium hydroxide
Caustic soda ✓ ✓ ✓ ✕ above 75°C. ✕ ✕

10% Ammonia ✓ ✓ ✓ ✕ ✓ ✕ above 35°C. ✓ ✕ above 75°C.
KEY : ✓ Probably suitable ● ✕ Probably unsuitable ● Ο Investigate if no alternative
119
IN THIS SECTION...
1. British standards
2. Hot dip galvanised (G)
3. Deep galvanised (D)
4. Pre-galvanised (PG)
Finishes 5. Stainless steel (S)

6. Powder coated (E)
Available on cable tray and Swiftrack support systems

1 British standards
Legrand ensures that all of the materials used during the
construction and finishing of their products conform to the
relevant standards, a full list of which is provided on p. 142.
In particular, the relevant standards for steel are :
Finish Product Current standard/grade
G Tray less than 1·5mm thick BS EN 10130 : 2006 Grade DC01
G Tray 1·5mm and thicker BS EN 10111 : 1998 Grade 1.0332 / BS EN 10025 : 2004 Grade S275JRC
G Swiftrack channel BS EN 10025 : 1993 Grade S235JRC (Ys = 250N/mm2 min)
G Swiftrack brackets BS EN 10025 : 2004 Grade S275JRC
D Tray BS EN 10025-5 : 2004 Grade S355JOWP
PG Tray BS EN 10346 : 2009 Grade DX51D
PG Swiftrack channel BS EN 10346 : 2009 Grade S250GD + Z275
S Tray and Swiftrack BS EN 10088 : 2005 Grade 1.4404 (equivalent to S316L31)
Finishes :
G = hot dip galvanised after manufacture
D = deep galvanised
PG = pre-galvanised
S = stainless steel
E = powder coated
Heavy duty (SRF) length shown in G Heavy duty (SRF) bend shown in Swiftrack channel support shown in
finish G finish PG finish
See p. 20 See p. 21 See p. 27
120
2 Hot dip galvanised (G) It is important to distinguish between ‘hot dip galvanised after
manufacture to BS EN ISO 1461’ and less precise descriptions
Hot dip galvanising after manufacture is an excellent, economical
such as ‘galvanised’, ‘mill galvanised’ or even the term ‘hot dip
protective finish used on support systems in many industrial and
galvanised’, when used without reference to any standard. Mill
commercial applications.
galvanised steel is frequently used as an alternative finish for
Background many support system components (see ‘pre-galvanised steel’,
The galvanised coating is applied as a final manufacturing process page 122), and is available from Legrand, but this material does
by immersing a steel component (after various pre-treatments) in have a much thinner zinc coating which renders it unsuitable for
a large bath of molten zinc; the zinc forms an alloy with the steel exposed applications.
substrate and protects the steel from corrosion in two ways. Suggested specification text : “All components should be hot dip
Firstly, the zinc coating surrounds the base steel with a total, galvanised after completed manufacture to the requirements of
tough physical barrier preventing corrosion of the steel by the BS EN ISO 1461.”
surrounding atmosphere. Secondly, if steel does become exposed,
e.g. at a cut edge, the zinc coating acts as a sacrificial anode and
will be gradually corroded in preference to the underlying steel. 3 Deep galvanised (D)
Corrosion products from the zinc will also be deposited onto A deep galvanised finish has all of the characteristics of hot dip
the steel, effectively re-sealing the surface and maintaining the galvanising but with a much thicker coating of zinc. This gives 2-3
integrity of the barrier. times the life of the standard hot dip galvanised (BS EN ISO 1461)
The life of a zinc coating is directly proportional to its thickness finish.
but in different environments this life does vary. However Background
because hot dip galvanising has been used for many years its The life of a galvanised coating depends very much upon the
life in diverse environments has been well established. The most degree of pollution of the surrounding atmosphere; in an
comprehensive guide to the design life of protective systems in industrial or marine environment corrosion of the zinc may take
different environments is contained in BS EN ISO 12944-5 : 2007 place at double or treble the rate which would occur in an inland
‘Paints and varnishes’ and BS EN ISO 14713 : 2009 environment. Thus, if heavy atmospheric pollution or aggressive
‘Parts 1 + 2 - zinc coatings’. In the presence of certain conditions exist in the vicinity of an installation, it is well worth
atmospheric pollutants (such as sulphur dioxide in industrial considering the benefits provided by deep galvanising.
areas) or when installed in an aggressive coastal or marine
Since this finish is produced in the same basic process as normal
environment the rate of dissipation of the zinc will be accelerated;
hot dip galvanising the initial cost premium of the material is
however in most situations hot dip galvanising remains an
relatively low; however the site installation costs will remain
extremely effective and economical corrosion resistant finish.
unchanged. Therefore, for a relatively modest premium on the
Specification overall installed cost the life of the installation can be increased
BS EN ISO 1461 provides the specification for a hot dip galvanised dramatically.
coating. Heavier gauges of steel will usually take up a thicker Specification
coating of zinc than lighter gauges so the standard defines the
Although the appropriate British Standard for deep galvanising
coating for different steel gauges in terms of the weight of zinc
is BS EN ISO 1461 (the same as for hot dip galvanising after
per square metre of surface area. Ensuring compliance with
manufacture) the process requires the use of steel containing
this standard is obviously important. Unfortunately it is not
a slightly higher proportion of silicon; often referred to as high
reasonable to use this weight principle for checking the coating
silicon steel. When galvanising normal mild steel the process
weight on components which have already been galvanised
effectively ceases after a short immersion time in the galvanising
as it involves calculating the surface area then weighing a
bath, giving, depending on the gauge of the steel, the coating
component, destructively removing the coating by chemical
thicknesses laid down within BS EN ISO 1461. However with
means and then re-weighing the component. It is therefore usual
silicon bearing steels the chemistry of the galvanising process
to measure instead the coating thickness (which can be done
changes, resulting in the zinc coating continuing to increase in
non-destructively using magnetic or electronic instruments) at
thickness as long as the steel remains immersed in the zinc.
a number of points on the surface of a component. The coating
thicknesses given in the standard and their equivalent coating Coatings up to three times as thick as the minimum requirements
weights are shown in table 1. of BS EN ISO 1461 are both possible and practical to achieve.
However the most cost effective coating thickness is usually twice
Table 1 the thickness required by BS EN ISO 1461.
Galvanising standard BS EN ISO 1461 : 2009
Minimum average zinc thickness
Steel Minimum average zinc

thickness thickness (microns)
Less than 1·5 mm 45

1·5 mm and thicker up to 3 mm 55
3 mm and thicker up to 6 mm 70
6 mm and thicker 85
Note
For threaded and very small components which are spun galvanised,
thinner coatings are used as recommended by BS EN ISO 1461.
121
4 Pre-galvanised (PG) Pickling and passivation
A zinc coating can be economically applied to steel sheet A stainless steel surface will have excellent corrosion resistance
immediately after its manufacture; the result, pre-galvanised due to the chromium oxide layer on the surface of the product.
steel (to BS EN 10346) can be an attractive, bright material which With some stainless steels however, the surface areas can
is suitable for non-arduous environments. become subject to corrosion due to the depletion of chromium
during welding, or the introduction of iron during a machining
Background
process (not applicable to most cable management products).
Pre-galvanised (or mill galvanised) steel is produced by unwinding
Where a uniform appearance is important after carrying out
steel coil and passing it continuously through a bath of molten
welding processes, it is often specified that all surfaces should
zinc and then past air jets to remove excess zinc from the surface.
be pickled and passivated to remove the smoke stain from the
The process is closely controlled to produce a thin, even and
welding process. Also where extreme corrosion resistance is
ripple-free zinc coating with very few imperfections.
called for, this process may help to remove crevice corrosion
Because this pre-galvanised steel coil must then be cut to shape from around the welding area. Experience has shown that this
during subsequent manufacture of support equipment, the is not normally necessary for the majority of cable management
edges of the finished components will have no zinc coating; this products.
aspect, together with the relatively light zinc coating provided
by the process, make pre-galvanised services supports suitable Pickling
for indoor, non-corrosive environments (particularly where an The pickling process involves the article being immersed in a
aesthetically attractive appearance is important) but unsuitable blend of acids which dissolve iron and iron oxides which adhere to,
for humid indoor or outdoor applications. or are embedded in, the surface of the stainless steel. These acids
cause a removal of the surface layer of between 1 and 3 microns.
Specification The article is finally rinsed with water to complete this stage of
For steel for Swiftrack channel, steel grade is BS EN 10346 : 2009 the process.
Grade S250GD + Z275
Passivation
Passivation of the stainless steel will occur naturally after pickling
5 Stainless steel (S) when the oxygen in the air will react with the surface of the steel
For all practical purposes most stainless steel services supports to form a passive chromium oxide layer. However it is usual for
can be regarded as maintenance free and suffering no corrosion. this passivation process to be speeded up by immersing the article
Inevitably there is a relatively high price to pay for these attractive in a nitric acid or other passivating agent.
properties but, in aggressive environments or where the cost Pickle and passivation is available as a special order finish, for
or inconvenience of gaining subsequent maintenance access is more information please contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333.
prohibitive, this initial cost premium may well be justified. Electropolishing
Background In various industries such as food, pharmaceutical and
Stainless steel contains a high proportion of chromium (usually electronics, there is a requirement for easier cleaning and
at least 17%) and the steel’s remarkable immunity to corrosive reduced bacterial growth on the surface of the stainless steel.
attack is conferred by the chromium-rich oxide film which occurs This increased surface smoothness is achieved by a process
naturally on its surface. This invisible film is not only inert and called electropolishing.
tightly bonded to the surface, it also re-forms quickly if the Electropolishing is, in principle, a reversal of the electroplating
surface is damaged in any way. process. The article is submerged in a special acid electrolyte and
The fire resistance of stainless steel is particularly noteworthy; a DC current passed into the article and through the electrolyte.
tests have demonstrated that stainless steel cable supports can This process removes the high spots from the surface micro
be expected to maintain their integrity for considerable periods roughness leaving a surface which is bright and smooth.
even when exposed to direct flame temperatures exceeding
1,000°C. This may be an important consideration where the
electrical circuits being supported provide for emergency power
or control systems.
Stainless steel is also used where hygiene is a major
consideration. Its advantages in such applications are again its
excellent resistance to the various chemicals and washes which
are frequently used for cleaning purposes and the smoothness of
surface (depending on the finish specified) which minimises the
soiling or contamination that can take place.
Specification
Many grades of stainless steel are available but the one generally
used in aggressive marine environments is BS EN 10088 Grade
1-4404 (equivalent to S316L31, BS 1449: Part 2). This grade has
improved corrosion resistance (particularly in the presence of
chlorides) and high temperature strength. It is much used in
the chloride-laden marine conditions which exist on offshore
installations and in coastal regions.
For less aggressive environments BS EN 10088 Grade 1-4301
(equivalent to 304, BS 1449: Part 2) is the normal grade. This
grade offers good corrosion resistance in internal applications and
also has a good aesthetic quality, often used in the dairy and food
industries. Final finishes with mechanical brushing or polishing
are often used to provide a good looking and robust surface finish.
122
6 Powder coated (E) Clear powder coating on pre-galvanised steel
Powder coated finishes give excellent protection against scratches Pre-galvanised steel with a clear polyester resin powder coating
as they are normally between 50 - 100% harder than the has excellent weathering characteristics.
equivalent wet paint finishes. This is due to the hard powder coated finish, which gives good
They are available in a wide range of colours and can have matt or mechanical protection and excellent corrosion resistance, being
various gloss finishes. In addition to the aesthetic qualities powder bonded to a sub surface of zinc. The zinc giving protection against
coating are available in various grades to cope with different site deep surface scatches by cathodic action.
conditions. Grades are produced to cope with exterior applications Pre-galvanised Steel
where there can be high levels of ultra violet light or low smoke This finish is described on page 122.
and fume applications for fire risk areas such as occur in tunnels. Clear Powder Coating
Because powder coated finishes are inherently resilient and This is carboxylated polyester resin finish which is a different
resistant to chemical or corrosive attack, these finishes are compound to the powder coated finish described opposite.
frequently used for protection only where there is no aesthetic
The application is the same as standard powder coating, namely
requirement.
it is applied as an electrostaticaly charged powder to the article
Background which is then melted onto the surface and baked into a hard
The process of powder coating is carried out by applying the surface in a stoving oven.
electrostatically charged powder to the article, and then passing The resultant surface finish gives a corrosion resistance in
the article into an oven where the powder is baked onto the the ASTM B117 Salt Spray test of 500 hours with creepage of
surface of the article. corrosion less than 2mm from the scribe mark.
The application of the powder, and the associated stoving, can
vary with different types of finish so the careful control of the
process is required.
Specification
With such a wide variety of types of powder available it is
necessary to specify in addition to the colour what the finish is
required to do.
The colour can be specified by BS or RAL number, or by exact
colour match if a sample of the colour is provided. The required
gloss level should also be given.
The usual finish is for aesthetic indoor use, but if other qualities
are required they should be clearly indicated at the outset as the
powder cost and application cost can vary considerably between
different types of powder.
Epoxy coated
Epoxy coatings are based on thermo-setting epoxy resins and
give a very hard, durable finish suitable for internal applications.
Epoxy coatings are usually quite thin but they have good chemical
resistance with excellent adhesion and coating flexibility.
Polyester epoxy mix
Some modern coating developments consist of both polyester and
epoxy. These give properties which are very suitable for use with
cable support systems. The finish is thick and fairly soft and gives
good protection to the cables being installed. The coating has
strong adhesive properties and in cases of fire is halogen free with
low smoke and fume characteristics. There are many types and
grades of these materials and when using them advice should be
sought from our technical sales support team, please contact us
on +44 (0) 845 605 4333.
Architectural powder coatings
These powder coatings are formulated to meet the particular
requirements of exterior environments. They are inherently
resilient and resistant to damage and chemical or corrosive
attack, providing maximum protection to the substrate. When
subjected to high levels of ultra violet light present within sunlight
the coatings have excellent gloss retention and resistance to
chalking. These coatings would normally be applied over a
galvanised finish.
123
IN THIS SECTION...
Cable tray systems
1. Design factors to consider
Installation of 2. Loading graphs
services
Max. cabling capacity (kg/m) = cable laying area (m2) x 2 800
Cable tray systems
h
Cable tray systems are intended for the support of a combination
of cables, electrical equipment and/or communication system w
installations. Where necessary cable tray systems may be used
for the segregation of cables.
Note : these systems are designed for use as supports for cables
and not as enclosures giving full mechanical protection. Cable laying area
These systems are covered by BS EN 61537.
Cable laying area (m2) = w (m) x h (m)
Applicable to cable tray
1 Design factors to consider
Consideration should be given to the following factors when Note : this formula only provides an estimate of the maximum
undertaking the design of a support system although some load which can be physically contained within a tray. The ability of
of these (e.g. snow/wind loads) may not be relevant to every that tray to support such a load depends upon the spacing of its
installation. supports.
(i) Distributed loads (eg. cables, pipes) Cable weights and diameters
(ii) Point loads Tables 1 and 2 below give typical weights and diameters (D) for
(iii) Snow, wind and external forces PVC sheathed, steel wire armoured cables with stranded copper
conductors.
(iv) Safety factor
Tables 3 and 4 give typical weights and diameters for PVC
(v) Deflection
sheathed, unarmoured stranded copper power cables. Cables with
(vi) Spacing of supports XLPE (cross linked polyethylene) insulation are usually slightly
(vii) Location of couplers lighter so the information given may also be used for these cables
(viii) Installation of cables within a support system too.
(ix) Earth protection For all other types of cable (e.g. paper insulated cable or cable
(x) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) with aluminium conductors) refer to the cable manufacturer’s
(xi) Thermal expansion and contraction catalogue for details and guidance.
Values show approx. weight and diameter of typical cables.
The following sections provide a wealth of useful information on D = Overall cable diameter.
each of these design aspects. Table 1 : PVC armoured power/control cables to BS 6346
Nom. area 2 core 3 core 4 core
(i) Distributed loads of conductor
(mm2) kg/m D in mm kg/m D in mm kg/m D in mm
Before commencing the design process for a new installation
it is usual to consider whether future changes in the pattern 1·5 0·3 12·3 0·3 12·8 0·4 13·5
of demand for building services will impose increased loading 2·5 0·4 13·6 0·4 14·1 0·5 15·0
requirements on the support system. If so, it is good design 4·0 0·5 15·1 0·5 15·8 0·7 17·8
practice to allow both the physical space and sufficient load 6·0 0·6 16·5 0·7 18·0 0·9 19·2
carrying capacity for the future addition of 25% more cables or 10·0 0·9 20·1 1·0 21·2 1·2 22·8
other loading medium. 16·0 1·0 21·9 1·2 23·1 1·7 26·3
Estimation of cable loads
If full details of the cabling layout are available then the likely Table 2 : PVC insulated and sheathed circular surface wiring
cable load can be calculated using either manufacturer’s
published information or the tables of cable weights and of conductor
diameters which are given opposite. However, it is often necessary (mm2) kg/m D in mm kg/m D in mm kg/m D in mm
to select a tray design in the absence of accurate information 1·5 0·1 7·7 0·1 8·2 0·1 9·1
on the likely cable load. To assist this selection process a useful 2·5 0·1 9·2 0·2 9·7 0·2 10·6
approach can be to choose a likely size of tray and then to 4·0 0·2 10·2 0·3 11·0 0·3 12·6
estimate the maximum cable weight which is capable of being
6·0 0·2 12·0 0·3 12·8 0·4 14·2
contained within it. This estimate may be arrived at using the
following guide : 10·0 0·4 14·6 0·5 15·6 0·7 17·4
16·0 0·6 16·9 0·7 18·0 0·9 20·0
124
Table 3 : PVC unarmoured stranded copper power
cables to BS 6346 W

of conductor
25 0·7 18·4 1·0 20·4 1·3 22·7

35 0·9 20·0 1·3 22·4 1·7 25·0 W
50 1·2 22·2 1·7 25·4 2·3 28·6
70 1·7 24·6 2·4 28·4 3·1 32·2
95 2·3 28·2 3·3 33·1 4·3 37·2
120 2·8 30·9 4·0 36·0 5·3 40·6
150 3·5 34·1 4·9 39·7 6·5 45·0
Single spans
185 4·2 37·8 6·1 44·1 8·0 49·8
For single spans the loading capability is also severely reduced. In
240 5·5 43·2 8·0 49·6 10·6 56·2
this circumstance the safe working load (SWL) should, as a simple
300 7·0 47·2 9·7 55·0 13·2 62·5 rule, be reduced to half that indicated by the loading graphs on
400 8·5 53·2 12·6 61·4 16·7 69·6 p. 131, and there must be no joint in the span.
This derating of the loading capacity for either single spans or
Table 4 : PVC armoured stranded copper power cables point loads depends to some extent upon the tray type and the
to BS 6346 intended span. If therefore the design calculations indicate this
Nom. area 2 core 3 core 4 core aspect is critical, more detailed information should be sought
of conductor from Legrand, contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333.
(iii) Snow, wind and external forces
25 1·3 23·0 1·7 25·1 2·1 27·5
The loading graphs on p. 131 show the maximum safe working
35 1·6 24·8 2·1 27·3 2·6 30·0
steady load for each type of support system. If the system is
50 2·0 27·2 2·6 30·5 3·5 34·8 outdoors and must also sustain snow, ice, wind or other variable
70 2·5 29·5 3·6 34·8 4·5 38·4 forces these must also be taken into account at the design stage.
95 3·5 34·4 4·6 39·1 5·9 43·3 Appropriate design data for UK weather conditions is given in
120 4·1 37·1 5·5 41·9 7·5 48·1 British Standard BS EN 1991, see p. 142.
150 4·9 40·2 7·0 47·2 8·8 52·3 For snow and ice the appropriate extra weight as indicated by
185 6·3 45·1 8·4 51·4 10·7 57·5 these standards must be added to the weight of the cable (and
240 7·8 50·5 10·7 57·3 13·5 63·9 any point loads) to give a total working load; this should then be
300 9·3 55·4 12·7 62·6 16·4 69·9 compared with the safe working load (SWL) for the tray using the
400 11·3 60·8 15·7 68·8 21·3 78·8 graphs in this document.
The horizontal force imposed by a wind is proportional to the
(ii) Point loads vertical surface area of the installation so particular care must
Point loads may consist of permanent equipment, such as lighting be taken where cable tray will be mounted on edge. Where high
luminaires, junction boxes or other switchgear, or temporary winds are likely, large spans should be avoided.
loads such as commissioning equipment or installation personnel High winds can also create a strong lifting force on tray or covers
(however, consider ‘Safety during the installation phase’ page 141). and this too must be borne in mind when installing covers
Analysis of uniformly distributed loads (UDL), such as cables or in exposed locations. Ideally covers should not be installed
pipes is relatively simple but analysing the effect of a point load temporarily, they should only be installed after the electrical
is quite complex; fortunately a simple alternative approach is installation has been completed and they must be properly
available. secured immediately.
Firstly, one makes the reasonable assumption that the point (iv) Safety factor
load will be situated in the worst position at mid-span. The force To arrive at a safe working load (SWL) for each type of equipment
this point load imposes can then be taken as equivalent to that Legrand test their products to find the ultimate failure load. The
imposed by a load of twice its value uniformly distributed along SWL is obtained by dividing the load before failure by a factor of
the span. Thus the point load can be converted to the equivalent 1·7 minimum.
uniformly distributed load which is then added to other UDL’s to This safety factor may need to be increased by the designer
produce one total uniform load. depending upon the circumstances. For example, if the support
system is expected to be subject to aggressive abuse a safety
Example: factor as high as three or more may be used. Such treatment is,
Point load = 30 kg however, the exception and care should be taken not to
Support spacing = 3 m over-design the system by using an unnecessarily high
UDL = 100 kg/m safety factor.
UDL equivalent to 30 kg point load = (v) Deflection
2 x Point Load = 2 x 30 kg = 60 kg = 20 kg/m The deflection of a cable tray under load is not directly related to
Total UDL = 100 kg/m + 20 kg/m = 120 kg/m its strength but it is obviously of aesthetic importance. For this
reason it may be necessary to estimate the likely deflection whilst
The suitability of a tray to carry this total load can then be designing an installation, especially if it will be in a highly visible
considered using the loading graph information (see p. 131). location. Experience has shown that in order to maintain a degree
Although this treatment does assume the point load will be in the of deflection which is subjectively acceptable to the eye, the load
‘worst case’ position, the installer should, given discretion, always on the cable tray will often be restricted to well below its safe
position any point load as close as possible both to a support and maximum.
to either side flange, minimising the stress on the installation, as
per the following illustration.
125
(vii) Location of couplers
In practice it is often impossible to predetermine where the
couplers will be located within a straight run of cable tray. However
it is well worth making some effort to roughly plan their position
during the early stages of installation.
The worst positions for the couplers is at mid-span. At these
locations they will suffer the greatest stress. A mid-span joint
Safe, but visually unacceptable
should be particularly avoided on the end spans of an installation to
minimise deflections.
The best position for joints in a continuous installation is on quarter
of the span distance on either side of each point of support.
Ideal coupler position

Reduce load to reduce deflection
(vi) Spacing of supports

Services support installations are usually considered as
S/4
multi-span arrangements but it is important to recognise that
the loading capability of the system is not uniform from end-to-
S
end. The strength of the two end spans in any run is much lower
than that of intermediate spans, even when the ends are rigidly
fixed. In many situations the end spans will be more lightly loaded Loading graphs
anyway; if however they are not and the installation will be fully Refer to loading graphs on page 131.
loaded from end-to-end then it is recommended that the support
spacing of both end spans should be reduced to no more than
three quarters that of intermediate spans. However it is not a
mandatory requirement, but is both useful and advisable.
Fully loaded
Short Full span Full span Short

span span
3/ S S S 3/ S
4 4
Sometimes the necessary support spacing may be dictated by

the nature of the building fabric. If however the designer has
discretion over the spacing of supports the loading graphs can
be used to maximise this distance. This will reduce the number
of support components and fixings that will be required, thus
reducing the overall cost of the installed system.
Supports for Cable Tray
If light duty (SS) cable tray is being installed then in most
circumstances a 1 m support spacing is ideal. Many light duty tray
installations are intended to carry just one or two cables and often
the tray supports will be mounted on the existing building fabric.
However, where more substantial cable trays are being used
it is often necessary to build a dedicated supporting structure;
some attention to the design of this can provide tremendous
economies in both purchasing and installation costs. On wider
trays the maximum Safe Working Load can be increased by fitting
an appropriate fishplate across the underside of each tray-to-tray
joint.
For further information, contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333
Support of fittings
Cable tray fittings must always be provided with local support.
The illustrations on pages 127 to 128 give recommended support
positions.
126
Recommended support locations – cable tray
Large = tray widths 450 mm and above

300 max. (large) Small = tray widths 300 mm and below
150 max. (small)
Support here for
large widths only
Support here for

large widths only
300 max. (large)

150 max. (small)
SS
SS, MRF, SRF, XRF 60°, 45°, 30°
90° flat bends flat bends
Support here for

large widths/
heavy loads only
300 max. (large)

150 max. (small)
MRF, SRF, XRF

60°, 45°, 30°
400 flat bends
max. Straight reducers
400
max.
400 400
max. max.
400
max.
90°, 60°, 45°, 30°
inside and outside risers
400 400
max. max.
400
max.
127
Recommended support locations – cable tray (continued)
Large = tray widths 450 mm and above

300 max. (large)
150 max. (small) Small = tray widths 300 mm and below
300 max. (large)

300 max. (large) 150 max. (small)
150 max. (small)
MRF, SRF, XRF

tees
300 max. (large)

150 max. (small)
MRF, SRF, XRF

4 way crosspieces
SS
tees
300 max. (large)
150 max. (small)
300 max. (large) SS

150 max. (small) 4 way crosspieces
300 max. (large) 300 max. (large)

150 max. (small) 150 max. (small)
128
(viii) Installation of cables within a support system (ix) Earth protection
Detailed guidance concerning the selection and use of appropriate Cable tray is deemed to provide continuous support to any cables
electric cables is available from cable manufacturers, relevant installed upon it but, because it is not completely enclosed, it
standards (both British Standards and European Cenelec does not offer mechanical protection. For this reason unsheathed,
Standards) and the Wiring Regulations. However the following single insulated power cables should not be installed on tray, all
general comments may also be helpful. cables should have some mechanical protection in the form of
Cables are designed for continuous operation within a range of PVC sheathing, steel wire armouring or a copper covering (MICC).
ambient temperatures; attention must be paid to the ventilation Where moisture may be present, copper covered cables must also
arrangements to ensure that the maximum temperature is be PVC sheathed to avoid electrochemical corrosion between the
not consistently exceeded. Where cable routings pass through copper and the cable support system.
enclosed ducts it is important to ensure that the ducts are large Cable tray can be specifically designed to act as a circuit
enough to avoid overheating. protective conductor (CPC), which connects exposed conductive
Cable support spacing parts of equipment to the main earth terminal and will thereby
Cables must either be continuously supported or supported at provide some protection against electric shock. For this to be
intervals which are no more than those given in Table 5 below. acceptable the cross-sectional area of the cable support must
Cables should not themselves be used as a support or as a exceed a value obtained by calculation, the formula for this
restraint for other loads. calculation being given in Regulation 543-01-03 of the Wiring
Regulations BS 7671. This formula takes into account the fault
Table 5 current of the circuit, the nature of the cables themselves and
the operating time of the disconnecting device used to protect
Cable diameter Support spacing (mm) against excessive currents. Other features, such as protection of
(mm) Horizontal(1) Vertical(2)
the support system against mechanical damage and corrosion
Below 100 250 400 (to ensure the CPC remains intact), visual identification that the
10 to 15 300 400 support system is being used as a CPC and the impedance of
16 to 20 350 450 the circuit must also be considered by a competent electrical
21 to 40 400 550 engineer before tray can be used as a CPC.
(1) From horizontal through to 60° inclination If armoured cables (with an integral CPC) are installed on a
(2) From 60° inclination (30° from vertical) through to vertical tray and the support system is not being used as a protective
Fixing of cables to cable tray conductor, then it is generally considered as a metal part which
Moulded plastic cable ties, cable cleats or perforated metal is neither extraneous nor exposed; continuity is not an issue in
strapping are most commonly used for attaching cables to cable this situation. Normal tray assembly methods are adequate and
tray. The slots in the tray are designed to accept M6 fasteners and BS 7671 (the Wiring Regulations) impose no requirement for
the perforation pattern will allow banding up to 18mm wide to be continuity of such metal parts unless they are being used as a
used. protective conductor.
If unarmoured cables are installed on a tray installation which is
Minimum bending radius of cables
not being used as a protective conductor, consideration should be
All cables have a minimum bending radius beyond which they given to the possibility of damage to these cables, causing the tray
should not be bent either during handling or when finally to become live and hence the need to earth the support system.
installed. Details of the minimum bending radius for various types
The continuity of properly fixed tray joints is such that earth
of cable are given in Table 6 below.
continuity connectors (bonding connectors) are not necessary
Table 6 for any general tray application; however in special locations
or hazardous areas (as described in BS 7671: Section 6) earth
Minimum bending radius continuity connectors may be required, subject to consideration by
Type of cable (mm) D = cable diameter a competent electrical engineer.
Unarmoured cable, D < 10 mm 3D (x) Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Unarmoured cable, 25 mm < D < 10 mm 4D In normal use cable tray is considered as passive in respect of
Unarmoured cable, D < 25 mm 6D electromagnetic influences. The installation of current carrying
Armoured cable to BS 5467, BS 6346 and media may cause emissions and these media may also be
BS 6724 (LSF cables) 8D influenced by electromagnetic signals from elsewhere but the
degree of influence will depend on the nature of the installation
and the apparatus connected to the system.
Radius of fittings A draft technical report IEC1000-S-1 provides details of the
On a cable support system the size and type of cables must cable separation required according to the type of signal being
be considered to ensure that the radius of the support fittings considered and the IEE Guidance Note No.1 provides further
exceeds the minimum bending radius of the cables themselves. information on the subject of EMC. However, as a basic principle,
The table above gives a general guide to these minimum values. if power and signal cables can be run separately on different trays
Cables must not be accidentally bent to a tighter radius during then this will significantly reduce any possibility of one electrical
installation. circuit having any undesirable influence upon another.
(xi) Thermal expansion and contraction
In locations where large variations in temperature are anticipated
the design of the support system should make allowance for
changes in the length of the support system due to the expansion
and the contraction of the metal.
129
2 Use of loading graphs Loading graphs
Provided the relevant graph line lies above the intersection of the The loads shown on all graphs are the safe recommended
load/span lines the proposed arrangement is acceptable. (See maximum loads that can be applied and must include wind,
the illustration opposite). The deflection will often be less than snow and any other external forces in addition to the cable load.
1/200th of the span and in most cases it will be less than 1/360th The graphs show the maximum load for tray installed at a
of the span. However where point loads will be imposed or where support spacing within its recommended range.
there are short runs with three spans or less, the deflection When the graph line is above the intersection of the required
will increase and the safe working loads (SWL) may need to be load and span lines, the support equipment is suitable for use
reduced from the values given. within those load and span conditions.
Further information on this subject is given on pages 124 to 126. The graphs shown are for hot dip galvanised finish.
These graphs should not be extrapolated to longer spans than When installed, inner span deflection will vary depending on
shown, nor should they be used for situations where the bed of joint positions but will typically be about half of test end span
the tray is vertically orientated. In exposed situations the use of deflection shown on following page.
long spans requires particularly careful consideration. Any further
information on loads and deflections for such circumstances
should be sought from Legrand, contact us
on +44 (0) 845 605 4333.
The values given in this document have been obtained from
extensive testing of our cable support equipment. They are given
as a guide, so that their customers may use Legrand’s products
to the best advantage; they are nevertheless average figures
which are given in good faith, but without accepting any liability in
contract, tort or otherwise in the event of different performance by
equipment which is actually supplied.
The cable support systems in this

document are not designed for use as
walkways or to support personnel during
cable installation.
130
SS light duty MRF medium duty
W(1) W(1)
For 50–225 mm widths – 12 mm depth
25 mm depth
For 300 mm and above – 18 mm depth
250
250
200
200

150
150
300 600
100
100
300
50
50
150
150
0
0·5 1·0 1·5 0
Span (m) 1·0 1·5 2·0
Span (m)
SRF heavy duty XRF extra heavy duty

(1)
W(1) W(1)
W
50 mm depth 80 mm depth
250
250 600
200
200 300
150
150 600 (2)
100
300
100
150
150 50
50
0 2·0 2·5 3·0

1·5 2·0 2·5 Span (m)
Span (m)
On XRF trays the graph shows the maximum safe
On wider MRF and SRF trays the working load when a fishplate is fitted across the
maximum safe working load can be underside of each tray-to-tray joint. Typical cable
increased by fitting an appropriate loads which are normally 50% of the maximum
fishplate across the underside of would not require a fishplate
each tray-to-tray joint
(1) W = For widths see selection charts (p. 12-15) Example
✘
(2) SRFL 600 – tested with fishplates
unacceptable
acceptable
✔
131
IN THIS SECTION... Swiftrack channel support
1. Channels
Structural Structural characteristics

1. Cable tray
2. Beams
2. Channel nuts
3. Framework brackets
4. Fasteners
support 3. Columns
4. Deflection
5. Cantilever arms
6. Maximum safe
recommended loadings
characteristics Designing support systems

1. Ceiling to floor applications
2. Ceiling mounted applications
7. Channels used as beams
8. Channels used as columns
including channel support systems 3. Wall mounted applications
9. Fully restrained and
unrestrained loads
4. Floor mounted applications 10. Beam loads
Structural characteristics
1 Cable tray Fixed beam
On many occasions cable tray is installed in circumstances where A fixed beam arrangement is a single structural member with
it will only ever carry a light cable load, possibly just one or two both ends fastened rigidly to supports. Compared with a simple
cables, and its main role is to physically secure and protect its beam this degree of restraint does significantly increase the
contents. In these situations it is often the inherent ruggedness ability of the beam to carry loads but it is unlikely that cable tray
or the aesthetics of the tray design which bear most heavily on can, in practice, be secured sufficiently rigidly to be considered as
the specification decision. However, when a support system is a fixed beam.
required to be more heavily loaded it is useful to have a knowledge
of the theoretical aspects of rudimentary structural design in
order to ensure that the completed system does fulfil its purpose
with the greatest safety and economy.
2 Beams
Any installed tray system can be considered structurally as a
loaded beam; four basic beam configurations may be found in a
typical installation :
Simple beam
Fixed beam
Continuous beam However, in the context of a complete tray system the main
Cantilever beam importance of the fixed beam configuration is that some
Simple beam appreciation of its properties, along with those of a simple
beam arrangement, will assist the designer to understand the
A single length of cable tray mounted on, but not fastened to, two
more complex behaviour of a continuous, multi-span cable tray
supports represents a simple beam, which will bend as any load is
installation.
applied to it with the supports offering no restraint to this bending.
Continuous beam
A typical multi-span tray installation behaves largely as a
continuous beam and the greater the number of spans the closer
the similarity. However in practice a run must contain joints and it
can also never be considered of infinite length so it is important to
appreciate how its characteristics do vary from span to span and
how these variations should be taken into account when designing
the installation.
This simple arrangement is fairly onerous and does not

realistically model many real-life installations; thus the load/
deflection information given in this document is based upon more
typical multi-span configurations, which incorporate joints too.
However, if an unjointed single span does actually occur the safe
When a run of cable tray is loaded uniformly from end to end the
working load (SWL) can, as a practical guide, be taken as 1/2 of
load on each span is effectively in balance with the loads on the
that indicated by the loading graphs.
adjacent spans.
132
Loads
3 Columns
balance Any vertically arranged component, whether tray or channel, acts
structurally as a column; however it is not usual to consider tray
in this way because it is not designed for this purpose.
Swiftrack channel sections, in both single and multiple
Inner Inner configurations, are however frequently arranged as vertical
span span columns and the properties of these sections are both consistent
and well known, making them suitable for an analytical approach
to be used.
This causes the inner spans to behave substantially as fixed
beams imparting to them a considerable load carrying ability. The downward load which can be applied to the end of a column
is proportional to the compressive strength of the material from
However the two end spans of the installation are not so
which it is made, but will reduce as the column gets longer.
counterbalanced thus they perform more akin to simple beams,
However there are few real applications where no loads are
with consequently lower load carrying capabilities.
applied from other directions and since the effects of such loads
No are very significant it is important to consider the totality of the
counter- Counter- intended structure rather than focus simplistically only on the
balance balance loads applied down the column.
Proper structural analysis must take detailed account of any
side forces or eccentric loads caused by cantilever arms or other
brackets fixed to the vertical channel. Such calculations must
be carried out by a qualified engineer. The necessary data on the
structural properties of the various channel sections is given on
End span Inner page 134, ‘Designing support systems’.
span
4 Deflection
However if this is not the case the support spacing on the two As discussed earlier (page 125, Deflection), the deflection of a
end spans should advisably be reduced to 3/4 of the intermediate tray under load is not directly related to its strength. However
spans in order to compensate (see page 126, spacing of supports). deflection is directly proportional to the applied load, so doubling
the load will double the consequent deflection.
W
d
Cantilever beam
This type of arrangement most commonly occurs with the Wx2
brackets which are used to support cable tray, these being fixed to 2d
the structure at one end only.
For cable tray installations it is usual to consider the cable load to
be uniformly distributed along the length of the cantilever arm (i.e.
across the width of the tray); however, if cables will be bunched
then their combined weight effectively acts as a point load on the
arm so the bunch should, ideally, be laid nearest the supported
Any point load will have a magnified effect upon deflection. For a
inner end.
point load placed at mid-span (the worst position) the deflection
will be approximately double that caused by the same load
uniformly distributed along the span, although this value will vary
depending upon the coupler and support positions.
133
Designing support systems
Swiftrack channel support system includes a range of versatile components which link together to provide support for any building
services, including tray, ladder, trunking, piping, sprinkler systems and heat/ventilation ducting. Assembled on site, without welding,
Swiftrack can be broken down into various elements. Each element needs to be checked to ensure the following :
– It can safely support the loads being imposed upon it (see p. 138-139)
– The proposed fixing to adjacent elements can also support the required loads (see p. 138)
Conforms to BS 6946
1 Ceiling to floor applications
SB702 SB706
LCA 225 PG
SA761 SA753
SA761 SA761
SP972 SP975
SP976
SA751
SA774
SA753
SA753 SA773
SC400
SP976
SC401
SB704 SB705
134
2 Ceiling mounted applications
SC400
SB706 SB504 SB504
SC400 SC400
SC401
SP968
CKP25 CKP25
SB500 SB500
SA752 SA752
SC400
SA762 SA762
3 Wall mounted applications
SB515
SA773
SP972 SB515
SP976
SP975
LCA 900 PG
SB515
LCA 450 PG
SP976
SC401
SA753
SB500 SB500
SC400
SA753
SB515
SC400
SC400 SB515
SB704
4 Floor mounted applications
SC400 SC400
SC401
SB502 SB502
SP976 SP975
SB500 SB500
SC400
SB702 SB702
135
2 Channel nuts
Swiftrack channel support The safe working loads for zinc plated channel nuts only.
Slip M10 : 3·0kN
1 Channels M12 : 3·5kN
Standard channels are cold rolled to BS 6946 from 2·5 mm Pullout M10 : 6·0kN
pre-galvanised mild steel to BS EN 10346 : 2009 grade S250GD + M12 : 8·0kN
Z275. Safety Factor 3 when tested to BS 6946
Light gauge channels are cold rolled from 1·5 mm pre-galvanised Torque tightened to : M10 : 5·5 kgf.m (40 ftlb)
mild steel to BS EN 10346 : 2009 grade S250GD + Z275.
M12 : 7 kgf.m (50 ftlb)
Back-to-back channels are formed by spot welding together two
finished single channels at 150 mm centres under controlled 3 Framework brackets
conditions to BS EN 1993-1-3 : 2006. All welds and spot welds are Brackets are manufactured to BS 6946.
suitably protected. Unless otherwise stated, brackets are made from 5 or 6 mm
The standard lengths for single or multiple channels are 3 m and thick steel to BS EN 10025 Grade S275JRC.
6 m. Material Properties
Minimum yield strength, Ys : 250N/mm2 Minimum yield strength : 275 N/mm2
Minimum ultimate strength : 350N/mm2
Maximum Loads
Minimum design strength, Py : 250N/mm2
Maximum loads for individual brackets are given with the
illustrations on pages 104 to 107. In most cases the mode
Section properties of failure will be slippage of the bracket along the channel.
However there are few channel/bracket combinations where the
Y Y Y Y Y
maximum load is dependent upon the strength of the bracket
X X X X
X X X X itself. Only M10 or M12 channel nuts and bolts should be used
Y Y for the attachment of load-bearing brackets.
SC200 X X SC203
Y
SC400 X Y
SC403
4 Fasteners
Fixing brackets and supports to Swiftrack channel
Y
SC401 Standard fasteners for Swiftrack are high tensile hexagon head
setscrews to BS 3692-8.8, these being zinc plated to
BS 3382 : Part 2.
Wt A Ixx Ztop Zbtm rxx Iyy ryy
kg/m mm2 mm4 (min) (max) mm mm4 mm
Cat. Nos. mm3 mm3 Channel type Fitting thickness Recommended
fastener(1)
SC200 1·8 219 10 779 862 1 330 7·1 49 776 15·1
SC203 1·6 219 8 960 794 961 6·4 49 318 15·0 Deep channel 6 mm and 8 mm M10 or M12 x 35 mm(2)
SC400 2·6 322 67 157 2 857 3 772 14·5 88 783 16·6
SC401 5·3 645 339 300 8 215 8 215 23·0 177 566 16·6 Shallow channel 7 mm and 8 mm M10 or M12 x 25 mm(2)
SC403 2·4 322 57 221 2 645 2 909 13·3 88 325 16·5
(1) The use of too long a fastener will prevent proper tightening because the bolt end will foul the
Wt = weight of section (kg/m) bottom of the channel before the head tightens down on the fitting
(2) When fastener brackets other than Swiftrack, longer bolts may be required if the bracket
A = cross-sectional area (mm2) thickness is greater than 8 mm
Ixx = moment of inertia = second moment of area (mm4) Fixing tray to supports
Ztop = section modulus about xx axis (mm3) Use M10 high tensile hexagon head setscrews. Screws should
Zbottom = section modulus about xx axis (mm3) be 20 mm long for shallow channel and 35 mm long for deep
rxx = radius of gyration (mm) channel.
Iyy = moment of inertia = second moment of area (mm4)
ryy = radius of gyration (mm)
xx = about xx axis
yy = about yy axis
136
5 Cantilever arms 6 Maximum safe recommended loadings
Maximum uniformly distributed loads for individual cantilever (Based upon a load factor of 1·6 for hot dip galvanised
arms are given on page 104. However, should the loading not be unrestrained condition as specified in BS EN 1993 – 1-3 : 2006)
uniform then the safe limit can be obtained by calculating the
bending moment produced by the intended loads and comparing Cantilever arms
40
this with the maximum permissible bending moment for the Maximum
Unit Arm uniformly Point load
relevant arm. weight length distributed at outer end 85
Cat. Nos. (kg) (mm) load (kgf) (kgf)
45 kgf.m for SA750 - SA755 and SA757
52 kgf.m for SA760 - SA766 SA750 0·64 150 350(1) 303
95 kgf.m for SA770 - SA776 SA751 0·85 225 350(1) 198
To obtain the bending moment resulting from any point load, SA752 1·03 300 304 152
multiply the size of the load by its distance from the inner end of SA753 1·42 450 202 101
the arm (see illustration A). SA754 1·81 600 150 75 Values assume the
If several point loads exist then the total bending moment will tray or other loading
SA755 2·20 750 110 55 medium is rigidly
be the sum of the individual bending moment produced by each SA757 2·60 900 90 45 fixed to cantilever
arm
point load (see illustration B).
If some part of the total load applied to an arm is uniformly Cantilever arms, universal
distributed along a section of the arm only, then this part load 40
Maximum
can be treated as a point load acting at the mid-point of that Unit Arm uniformly Point load
section of arm to which it is applied (see illustration C). Cat. Nos.
weight
(kg)
length
(mm)
distributed
load (kgf)
at outer end
(kgf) 130
SA760 0·64 150 700(1) 350

Load SA761 0·85 225 456(1) 228
W kg SA762 1·03 300 350 175
A
xm SA763 1·42 450 230 115
SA764 1·81 600 170 85 Values assume the
tray or other loading
SA765 2·20 750 136 68 medium is rigidly
Bending moment = Wx kgm fixed to cantilever
SA766 2·60 900 110 55 arm
W kg
Cantilever arms, double channel
xm
B Maximum
40
ym V kg Unit Arm uniformly Point load

zm U kg Cat. Nos. (kg) (mm) load (kgf) (kgf)
175
SA770 1·14 150 700(1) 648
SA771 1·68 225 700(1) 420
Total bending moment = SA772 2·02 300 650 325
(Uz + Vy + Wx) kgm
SA773 2·90 450 430 215
SA774 3·78 600 320 160 Values assume the
tray or other loading
Uniformly SA775 4·66 750 250 125 medium is rigidly
C distributed W SA776 5·60 900 200 100 fixed to cantilever
load over arm
part of arm
Note
The loads for stainless steel cantilever arms are 60% of those
W given in the tables, except those marked (1) where the limit is
50%.
Cantilever arm loads detailed in the tables above are for M12
Treat as a point load screws and channel nuts.
applied at mid-point Assumes loads are rigidly fixed to cantilever arms in such a way
as to prevent the arms from twisting.
Note
Assumes loads are rigidly fixed to cantilever arms in such a way
as to prevent the arms from twisting.
137
7 Channels used as beams 9 Fully restrained and unrestrained loads
The maximum safe load for a channel can be calculated There are two alternative approaches to providing
knowing the strength of the steel (yield stress). Alternatively, information on the structural strength of channel section
if the appearance of the channel under load is considered used as beams.
important, then its deflection can be kept within visually Data is sometimes given on the basis of a fully restrained
acceptable limits. condition, which assumes that the channel section is in
Deflection limitations may render a lower recommended some way completely prevented from twisting under load
loading than that calculated from the strength of the steel. (see illustration A). Alternatively data may be given on the
Thus the two alternative approaches are: basis of an unrestrained condition which assumes that,
1) To apply a maximum mid-span deflection of 1/200th of the because no channel is perfect, placing it under load may
span. result in some twisting taking place even though the ends of
2) To place no limit on deflection and to apply a maximum the channel are firmly secured (see illustration B).
load derived from calculations which include both the Because the channel is constrained to remain in the
minimum yield stress of the steel and a safety factor (1.6). optimum position, data given on a fully restrained basis
Details of the maximum recommended uniformly distributed will, for larger spans, suggest that a far higher load can be
and point loads under both of these conditions are given in applied than with the unrestrained condition.
the table on page 139; these are provided for both restrained Both alternative sets of data are given in the table
and unrestrained conditions (see opposite) and they apply to on page 139; however, unless positive intermediate
the worst situation of a simple single span only. restraint is applied to completely prevent any twisting it is
If in practice loads are neither uniformly distributed across recommended that the data for unrestrained channels, given
the complete beam nor imposed at mid-span only, it is in the table opposite, should normally be used.
still possible to use a safe approximation and assess the
suitability of a channel section. Do this by assuming that all
loads are point loads imposed at mid-span only, and then
consider the point load data in the table. This approximation A
will render a cautious result, which is nevertheless sufficient
in most cases to show that a channel is satisfactory.
However, if it does yield an unsatisfactory result check with
Legrand, as the degree of inherent caution is such that the
design may still be safe. Legrand will be pleased to recheck
your calculations, using your intended loadings – contact us
on +44 (0) 845 605 4333.
The data provided in the table on page 139 is calculated in Load
accordance with BS 5950 Part 5.
8 Channels used as columns
It is rare that any loads will be applied only to the end of a
vertical column; most practical loading conditions involve
the use of brackets and fittings attached to the open side
of the channel. Loads applied in this way will produce a
combined axial force down the column and a bending force B
on the side of the column which will reduce the allowable
maximum load. The effects of such eccentric loadings
should be carefully checked in accordance with standard
design practice as given in BS 5950 Part 5.
Legrand will be pleased to give further advice and
assistance on request – contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333.
Load
138
10 Beam loads Column loads Note to tables
(1) Based on a limited
Laterally unrestrained condition Fully laterally restrained condition
Safe maximum loads Maximum deflection Safe maximum loads Maximum deflection deflection of L200, the safe
of span/200 of span/200 maximum load value is given
Distance Uniformly Point Point Uniformly Point Point Maximum axial column load(4) which will give a deflection
between distributed load at UD load at distributed load at UD load at Column of < L200
supports across mid-span load mid-span across mid-span load mid-span height (2) Limited by slip on a single
Cat. Nos. (m) span (kgf) (kgf) (kgf) (kgf) span (kgf) (kgf) (kgf) (kgf) Section (m) (kgf) bolt connection each end
SC400 0·20 700(2) 700(2) 700(2) 700(2) 700(2) 700(2) 700(1) 700(1) SC400 0·20 6325 (3) For columns, the limiting
slenderness ratio of 180
SC200 0·20 687 343 687(1) 343(1) 687 343 687(1) 343(1) SC200 0·20 4279 is exceeded at the length
indicated
SC401 0·20 700(2) 700(2) 700(2) 700(2) 700(2) 700(2) 700(1) 700(1) SC401 0·20 11475 (4) It should be noted that
SC400 0·40 700(2) 561 700(2) 561(1) 700(2) 561 700(1) 561(1) SC400 0·40 6217 maximum axial column
loads are supplied for
SC200 0·40 343 171 343(1) 171(1) 343 171 343(1) 171(1) SC200 0·40 3850 guidance only. It is unlikely
SC401 0·40 700(2) 700(2) 700(2) 700(2) 700(2) 700(2) 700(1) 700(1) SC401 0·40 11375 that columns will be loaded
with axial load only. Most
SC400 0·60 700 374 747(1) 374(1) 747 374 700(1) 374(1) SC400 0·60 5982 practical load conditions will
involve the use of brackets
SC200 0·60 226 113 226(1) 113(1) 228 114 228(1) 114(1) SC200 0·60 2879 and fittings attached to the
SC401 0·60 700(2) 700(2) 700(2) 700(2) 700(2) 700 700(1) 700(1) SC401 0·60 11041 column. Loads applied in
this way will produce both
SC400 0·80 543 271 543(1) 271(1) 560 280 560(1) 280(1) SC400 0·80 5640 axial load and bending on the
columns which will reduce
SC200 0·80 164 82 134 82(1) 170 85 134 84 SC200 0·80 1867 the allowable maximum load
SC401 0·80 700(2) 700 700(2) 700(1) 700(2) 700 700(1) 700(1) SC401 0·80 10621 The above loads have been
treated as imposed loads in
SC400 1·00 419 210 419(1) 210(1) 447 223 447(1) 223(1) SC400 1·00 5102 accordance with
SC200 1·00 126 63 85 53 136 68 85 53 SC200 1·00 1253 BS 5950 Part 5 and
accordingly a load factor of
SC401 1·00 700(2) 548 700(2) 548(1) 700(2) 582 700(1) 582(1) SC401 1·00 10035 f = 1·6 has been assumed.
SC400 1·20 336 168 336(1) 168(1) 371 186 371(1) 186(1) SC400 1·20 4346 Should the loads to be
applied be of a permanent
SC200 1·20 101 50 58 36 113 56 58 36 SC200 1·20 891 nature it may be appropriate
to use a load factor of f =
SC401 1·20 700(2) 440 700(2) 440(1) 700 484 700(1) 484(1) SC401 1·20 9193 1·4. This would lead to an
SC400 1·40 275 138 271 138(1) 317 159 271 159(1) SC400 1·40 3549 increase in the load capacity
provided that capacity is
SC200 1·40 83 41 42 26 96 48 42 26 SC200 1·40 664 not limited by bolt slip or
deflection
SC401 1·40 700 361 700(1) 361(1) 700 414 700(1) 414(1) SC401 1·40 8088
Loads given in the chart are
SC400 1·60 230 115 206 115(1) 277 139 206 129 SC400 1·60 2872 for pre-galvanised channels
SC200 1·60 69 35 31 19 83 42 31 19 SC200 1·60 513 to BS EN 10346 grade
S250GD Z275. The process
SC401 1·60 604 302 604(1) 302(1) 700 362 700(1) 362(1) SC401 1·60 6889 of manufacturing channel
SC400 1·80 194 97 162 97(1) 245 123 162 101 SC400 1·80 2345 increases the strength of
the steel and this increase
SC200 1·80 59 29 23 15 73 37 23 15 SC200 1·80 408 has been allowed for in the
data (as recommended in
SC401 1·80 510 255 510(1) 255(1) 641 321 641(1) 321(1) SC401 1·80 5792 BS 5950 Part 5). However, if
SC400 2·00 165 83 130 81 220 110 130 81 SC400 2·00 1938 channels are subsequently
hot dip galvanised the
SC200 2·00 51 25 18 11 66 33 18 11 SC200 2·00 332(3) stresses created during
SC401 2·00 434 217 434(1) 217(1) 575 288 575(1) 288(1) SC401 2·00 4874 manufacture are relieved
by the heat of the process,
SC400 2·20 142 71 106 66 199 100 106 66 SC400 2·20 1625 thereby negating the
SC200 2·20 44 22 14 9 59 29 14 9 SC200 2·20 276(3) strength enhancement
Therefore for hot dip
SC401 2·20 371 186 371(1) 186(1) 521 261 521(1) 261(1) SC401 2·20 4131 galvanised channels the
SC400 2·40 123 61 87 55 182 91 87 55 SC400 2·40 1381 loads in the chart should be
reduced by between 10%
SC200 2·40 38 19 11 7 53 27 11 7 SC200 2·40 233(3) and 20% depending on the
SC401 2·40 319 160 319(1) 160(1) 476 238 460 238(1) SC401 2·40 3534 section. A 20% reduction
will provide a conservative
SC400 2·60 107 53 73 46 167 83 73 46 SC400 2·60 1186 maximum load value for all
SC200 2·60 33 17 8 5 49 24 8 5 SC200 2·60 199(3) types of hot dip galvanised
channel
SC401 2·60 276 138 276(1) 138(1) 436 219 389 219(1) SC401 2·60 3051
All loads are for brackets
SC400 2·80 94 47 61 38 154 77 61 38 SC400 2·80 1030 fixed with M12 setscrews
SC200 2·80 29 15 6 4 45 22 6 4 and M12 zinc plated channel
SC200 2·80 172(3) nuts
SC401 2·80 240 120 240(1) 120(1) 405 202 333 202(1) SC401 2·80 2658
SC400 3·00 82 41 52 33 143 71 52 33 SC400 3·00 902
SC200 3·00 25 13 4 3 41 21 4 3 SC200 3·00 150(3)
SC401 3·00 209 105 209(1) 105(1) 376 188 286 179 SC401 3·00 2335
139
IN THIS SECTION...
Export packaging
Packaging, Handling and storage
Safety during installation phase
handling, storage
and safety
Export packaging Non-containerised seafreight, road or airfreight
Straight lengths
Safe handling
All Legrand products can be supplied packed appropriately for
any mode of shipment.
The various packing options are illustrated below.
Further details and packing recommendations are available from
Legrand, contact us on +44 (0) 845 605 4333.
Even when appropriately packed it is most important that
equipment is correctly loaded. Equipment is steel
All equipment must be properly secured against movement strapped onto a wooden base.
during transit otherwise damage may occur during the journey. If required the complete assembly is shrink wrapped in heavy
Containerised seafreight duty polythene.
Straight lengths Shipping marks are applied to meet with contract requirements.
Specialised packing
Legrand can also supply equipment packed in wooden crates or
wooden cases for shipment to destinations where transhipment
or rough handling en route is likely or where transport over
rough terrain is anticipated.
Wooden casing
• The specially designed wooden framework enables lifting of

the pallet by fork lift vehicle from either side or one end only.
It is also designed to prevent insertion of the forks between
components which will cause damage.
• Equipment is steel strapped to the wooden framework. If
required the complete assembly is shrink wrapped in heavy
duty polythene.
• Shipping marks are applied to meet with contract requirements.
Cable tray and support system accessories Equipment is steel strapped in suitable stacks.
Stacks are then tightly packed within a case constructed from
close wooden boards with no gaps.
Wooden crating
• The specially designed wooden framework enables lifting of

the pallet by fork lift vehicle from either side or one end only.
It is also designed to prevent insertion of the forks between
components which will cause damage.
• Equipment is steel strapped to the wooden framework.
The complete assembly is shrink wrapped in heavy duty
polythene. Equipment is steel strapped in suitable stacks.
• Shipping marks are applied to meet with contract Each stack is then shrink wrapped in heavy duty polythene.
requirements. Stacks are then tightly packed within a wooden crate.
140
Handling and storage
Safe handling Wet storage stain
Site deliveries will only be made provided suitable mechanical Failure to comply with the above storage conditions may result
handling equipment is available on site. in galvanised material being quickly disfigured by Wet storage
The delivered material must be treated with care. Lifting stain. Fortunately this problem is rarely serious and (unless the
must only be carried out from the sides and lifting forks must poor storage conditions have continued unchecked for several
pass below a complete stack. Forks must never be inserted months) it has no significant effect on the long term corrosion
into the end of the stack (unless goods are packed in special resistance of the finish. Where equipment has been affected by
containerisation crates, see Export Packaging on page 140); Wet storage stain the unsightly marking will usually become
this practice is likely to cause the safety limits of most lifting much less prominent and will often disappear completely within
vehicles to be exceeded and will certainly cause damage to the months of installation.
equipment being lifted.
Safety during installation phase
For offloading by crane suitable lifting beams should
be inserted from side to side beneath a stack and these Site safety
must be sufficiently long to avoid undue pressure on the Heavy duty cable trays are designed for rugged conditions and
edges of the bottom components. can withstand some abuse. However they are not designed or
intended for use as walkways or scaffolds and proper working
platforms or temporary access scaffolding must be provided for
the use of installation personnel.
The tensioned banding used for securing bundles of Control of hazardous substances
equipment during transport is not suitable for lifting Legrand cable management support systems will
purposes. When cutting this banding appropriate eye have a surface coating of either zinc, light oil or
protection must be worn to avoid injury. a plastic material, depending upon the specified
finish.
If any welding of equipment is carried out
Sheared steel (particularly pre-galvanised or stainless these substances can give rise to fumes and so
steel) does have relatively sharp edges and protective appropriate ventilation must be provided to ensure
gloves must be worn during handling. the exposure of the operator is kept below the
statutory limits.
The current occupational exposure limits for zinc
Storage oxide fumes published by the U.K. Health & Safety
Most support equipment is supplied with a corrosion resistant Executive are 10mg/m3 for short term exposure and
finish (often hot dip galvanising) which will, once the equipment 5mg/m3 for long term exposure.
is erected and open to the air, have a service life of many years.
However if hot dip galvanised equipment is allowed to become
wet whilst stacked awaiting installation the finish can quickly
suffer from unsightly staining and powdering on the surface.
This is known as Wet storage stain (see below) and the effects
are particularly exaggerated if products are left in back to back
contact.
It is therefore essential that all support system equipment is
stored in a dry, unheated environment and that the following
precautions are observed to prevent deterioration on site :
a. Any outer packaging should be removed from stacks
immediately following delivery, before the goods are placed in
store.
b. Store all support equipment under cover, in dry, unheated
premises. Do not leave any uncovered, part-used stacks lying
outside for long periods.
c. If stacks of equipment have become wet they must be
re-stacked as soon as possible with wooden battens inserted
between components to allow air to circulate.
d. If no undercover storage is available then equipment should
be re-stacked as in (c) immediately following delivery and
a simple shelter, using polythene or a tarpaulin, should be
erected over the stored equipment to protect it from rain. This
covering should not be laid directly onto the stack as air must
be allowed to circulate through and around the stored goods.
e. Inspect stored goods regularly to ensure that moisture has not
penetrated into the stacks.
f. Do not store the delivered material where people will walk
across it.
141
Relevant British,
European and
International
standards
Standard Type BS No Part Title
BS 1140 0 Specification for resistance spot welding of uncoated and coated low carbon steel.
BS EN 1179 0 Zinc and zinc alloys. Primary zinc.
BS EN ISO 1461 0 Hot dip galvanised coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles –
specifications and test methods.
BS 7371 3 Coatings on metal fasteners. Specification for electroplated zinc coatings
BS EN ISO 2081 0 Metallic and other inorganic coatings. Electroplated coatings of zinc with supplementary
treatments on iron or steel
BS EN ISO 3506 1 Mechanical properties of corrosion resistant stainless steel fasteners. Part 1, Bolts,
Screws and Studs.
BS EN ISO 3506 2 Mechanical properties of corrosion resistant stainless steel fasteners. Part 2 Nuts.
BS 3692 0 ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts. Specification.
BS 4320 0 Specification for metal washers for general engineering purposes. Metric series.
BS 4872 1 Specification for approval testing of welders when welding procedure approval is not
required. Fusion welding of steel.
BS 5950 5 Structural use of steelwork in building.
BS 6338 0 Chromate conversion coatings on electroplated zinc and cadmium coatings.
PD 6484 0 Commentary on corrosion at bimetallic contacts and its alleviation.
BS 6946 0 Specification for metal channel cable support systems for electrical installations.
142
Standard Type BS No Part Title
BS 7671 0 Requirements for electrical installations. IEE Wiring Regulations. Seventeenth Edition.
BS EN ISO 9000 Quality management systems - fundamentals and vocabulary.
BS EN ISO 9001 Quality management systems - requirements.
BS EN ISO 9004 Quality management systems - guidelines for performance improvements.
BS EN 10025 2 Hot rolled products of structural steels. Technical delivery conditions for non alloy
structural steels.
BS EN 10025 5 Hot rolled products of structural steels. Technical delivery conditions for structural steels
with improved atmospheric corrosion resistance.
BS EN 10088 1 Stainless steels.

Part 1: List of stainless steels.

Part 2: Technical delivery conditions for steel sheet/plate and strip of corrosion resisting
steels for general purposes.

Part 3: Technical delivery conditions for semi-finished products, bars, rods, wire, sections
and bright products of corrosion resisting steels for general purposes.
BS EN 10346 0 Continuously hot-dip coated steel flat products. Technical delivery conditions.
BS EN ISO 12944 5 Paints and varnishes - Corrosion protection of steel structures by protective paint systems.
Part Protective paint systems.
BS EN ISO 14713 1 Zinc coatings. Guidelines and recommendations for the protection against corrosion of iron
and steel in structures. General principles of design and corrosion resistance.
BS EN ISO 14713 2 Hot dip galvanising. Guidelines and recommendations for the protection against corrosion
of iron and steel in structures. General principles of design and corrosion resistance.
IEC 61537 0 Cable Tray systems and cable ladder systems for cable management.
BS EN 1991 1.3 Eurocode 1 : Action on structures. General actions : snow loads
BS EN 1991 1.4 Eurocode 1 : Action on structures. General actions : wind loads
BS EN 1993 1.3 Eurocode 3 : Design of steel structures. General rules. Supplementary rules for cold-
formed members and sheeting.
143
Page Page Page Page Page Page
Cat. Nos. Cat. Nos. Cat. Nos. Cat. Nos. Cat. Nos. Cat. Nos.
No. No. No. No. No. No.
500000 LCB50F 24 SB528 29 SRFL75F 20 SW08 32

LCB75F – Q SB532 – SRFL100F – SW10 –
5572 33 33 LCB100F – QBF 18 SB534 – SRFL150F – SW12 –
5572 43 – LCB150F – SB536 – SRFL225F –
5572 53 – LTH50F – R SB550 – SRFL300F 20 T
5572 63 – LTH75F – SB551 – SRFL450F –
5572 73 – LTH100F – RB0612 26 SB552 – SRFL600F – TR06 26
5572 83 – LTH150F – RB0612S – SB554 – SRFL750F – TR08 –
LTH225F – RB0616 – SB555 – SRFL900F – TR10 –
LTH300F – RB0616S – SB556 – SRFORWAF 21 TR12 –
8000000 LTH450F – RB0620 – SB600 30 SRFORWF – TW06 32
87665 02 33 LTH600F – RB0620S – SB601 – SRFRWKF – TWG06 –
87665 03 – LTH750F – RB0625 – SB602 – SRFTWF –
87665 04 – LTH900F – RB0630 – SB603 29 SRFUBF 20
87665 05 – RB0640 – SB603+ – SRFUTWBF 21 U
87665 06 – RB0650 – SB606 – SRFXWF – UF450F 18
87665 07 – M RBG0612 – SB607 – SRQBCF 20
87665 08 – MFF 25 RBG0616 – SB650 30 SS0616 31
87665 09 – MRFABWF 19 RC06 – SB651 – SS0620 – W
87665 10 – MRFARWF – RC08 – SB700 – SS0625 – WFF 25
87665 11 – MRFAXRWF – RC10 – SB701 – SS0630 –
87665 13 – MRFBWAF – RC12 – SB702 – SS0820 –
87665 14 – MRFBWF – RWG06 – SB703 – SS0825 – Z
87665 15 – MRFCCWF 25 SB704 – SS0830 – ZC1 30
87665 16 – MRFCF 18 S SB705 – SS0835 – XRFBWAF 22
87665 18 – MRFC50F – SB706 – SS0840 – XRFBWF –
87665 20 – MRFCVWF 25 SA750 28 SB707 – SS0850 – XRFCCWF 25
87665 30 – MRFDVF – SA751 – SC2003M 27 SS1016 – XRFCF 22
87665 45 – MRFIRWAF 19 SA752 – SC2006M – SS1020 – XRFDVF 25
87665 50 – MRFIRWF – SA753 – SC2033M – SS1025 – XRFIRWAF 23
87665 60 – MRFL50F 18 SA754 – SC2036M – SS1030 – XRFIRWF –
SA755 –
87665 70 – MRFL75F – SA756 – SC2103M – SS1035 – XRFL100F 22
MRFL100F – SA757 – SC2133M – SS1040 – XRFL150F –
MRFL150F – SA760 – SC4003M – SS1045 – XRFL225F –
A MRFL225F – SA761 – SC4006M – SS1050 – XRFL300F –
AGALVPAINT 25 MRFL300F – SA762 – SC4013M – SS1060 – XRFL450F –
AEPOXYPAINT 25 MRFL450F – SA763 – SC4016M – SS1220 – XRFL600F –
MRFL600F – SA764 – SC4033M – SS1225 – XRFORWAF 23
MRFL750F – SA765 – XRFORWF –
SC4036M – SS1230 –
C MRFL900F – SA766 –
SC4103M – SS1235 – XRFRWKF –
CKP25 24 MRFORWAF 19 SA770 – XRFTWF –
SC4133M – SS1240 –
CP1035 31 MRFORWF – SA771 – XRFUTWBF –
SC850 30 SS1250 –
CP1035S – MRFRWKF – SA772 – XRFCVWF –
SC851 – SSARWF 17
MRFTWF – SA773 – XRFXWF –
SC852/21 – SSBWAF 16
MRFUBF 18 SA774 –
SC852/41 – SSBWF –
E MRFUTWBF 19 SA775 –
SC852/82 – SSCCWF 25
EB06 32 MRFXWF – SA776 –
SC853 – SSCVWF –
EB08 – MRQBCF 18 SA790 –
SC854 – SSDVF –
EB10 – SA791 –
SC855 – SSG0612 31
SA792 –
SC856 – SSG0616 –
O SA793 –
SC950B – SSG0620 –
F OH50F 24 SA794 –
SC950W – SSG0635 –
FF 25 OH75F – SA795 –
SC951B – SSIRWAF 16
FL2 30 OH100F – SA796 –
SC951W – SSIRWF –
FW06 32 OH150F – SB500 29
SC952 – SSL50F –
FW08 – SB501 –
SC953 – SSL75F –
FW10 – SB502 –
SP960 – SSL100F –
FW12 – P SB503 –
SP964 – SSL150F –
PN060 27 SB504 –
SP965 – SSL225F –
PN061 – SB505 –
SP968 – SSL300F –
H PN062 – SB50606 –
SP969 – SSORWAF 17
HN06 31 PN080 – SB50608 –
SP972 – SSORWF –
HN08 – PN081 – SB50610 –
SP973 – SSRWKF –
HN10 – PN082 – SB50612 –
SP975 – SSTWF –
HN12 – PN100 – SB507 –
SP976 – SSXWF –
PN101 – SB508 –
SRFABWF 21 STB50F 24
PN102 – SB509 –
SRFARWF – STB75F –
L PN120 – SB510 –
SRFAXRWF – STB100F –
LCA100F 24 PN121 – SB511 –
SRFBWAF – STB150F –
LCA150F – PN122 – SB513 –
SRFBWF – STB225F –
LCA225F – PTFEB 25 SB514 –
SRFCCWF 25 STB300F –
LCA300F – PW06 32 SB515 –
SRFCF 20 STB450F –
LCA450F – PW08 – SB518 30
SRFCVWF 25 STB600F –
LCA600F – PW10 – SB520 29
SRDVF – STB750F –
LCA750F – PW12 – SB524 –
SRFIRWAF 21 STB900F –
LCA900F – SB526 –
SRFIRWF – SW06 32
144
LEGRAND
WORLDWIDE
Algeria France Morocco Slovenia
Legrand Legrand S.A. Simapel Legrand SLV d.o.o
Tel. : (213) 21 91 38 32 Tel. : (33) 5 55 06 87 87 Tel. : (212) 2 235 93 73 Tel. : 386 (0) 1 562 01 70
Fax : (213) 21 91 26 39 Fax : (33) 5 55 06 88 88 Fax : (212) 2 235 58 30 Fax : 386 (0) 1 562 13 12
Australia Germany Netherlands South Africa
Legrand Legrand GmbH Legrand Netherlands B.V. Legrand electrical accessories
Tel. : (61) 2 87 19 43 33 Tel. : (49) 29 21 10 40 Tel. : (31) 411 653 111 Tel. : (27) 11 444 79 71
Fax : (61) 2 87 19 43 45 Fax : (49) 29 21 10 42 02 Fax : (31) 411 653 158 Fax : (27) 11 444 79 80
Austria Greece New Caledonia Spain
Legrand Osterreich Helliniki Legrand S.A. Legrand Legrand Group España
Tel. : (43) 1 277 62 Tel. : (30) 2 10 67 97 500 Tel. : (687) 76 49 28 Tel. : (34) 91 656 18 12
Fax : (43) 1 277 62 225 Fax : (30) 2 10 67 97 540 Fax : (687) 25 95 64 Fax : (34) 91 656 67 88
Belarus Hong Kong New Zealand Switzerland
Legrand Legrand (HK) Ltd HPM Legrand Legrand (Suisse) S.A.
Tel. : (375) 17 205 04 78/79 Tel. : (852) 26 87 42 00 Tel. : (64) 9 442 08 000 Tel. : (41) 56 464 67 67
Fax : (375) 17 205 04 78/79 Fax : (852) 26 87 43 00 Fax : (64) 9 442 08 003 Fax : (41) 56 464 67 60
Belgium Hungary Ouzbekistan Syria
Legrand Belgique S.A. Legrand Zrt Legrand Legrand
Tel. : (32) 2 719 17 11 Tel. : (36) 63 51 02 00 Tel. : (998) 71 138 9948 Tel. : (963) 11 33 22 920/970
Fax : (32) 2 719 17 00 Fax : (36) 63 51 02 10 Fax : (998) 71 138 9947 Fax : (963) 11 33 22 512
Bosnia-Herzegovina India Peru Thailand
Legrand Legrand (India) Pvt Ltd Bticino del Peru S.A. Bticino (Thailand) Limited
Tel. : (387) 33 71 10 25 Tel. : (91) 22 30 41 62 00 Tel. : (51) 1242 60 00 Tel. : (66) 2 656 91 62/67
Fax : (387) 33 52 17 84 Fax : (91) 22 24 93 31 58 Fax : (51) 1242 41 00 Fax : (66) 2 656 91 97
Brazil Indonesia Philippines Tunisia
GL Electro-Eletronicos Ltda PT Legrand Indonesia Bticino Philippines Inc. Legrand
Tel. : (55) 11 56 44 26 00 Tel. : (62) 21 525 06 08 Tel. : (63) 2 89 28 972 Tel. : (216) 71 964 022
Fax : (55) 11 51 81 06 04/59 14 Fax : (62) 21 525 59 35 Fax : (63) 2 89 28 971 Fax : (216) 71 963 297
Bulgaria Iran Poland Turkey
Legrand Alborz Electrical Industries Ltd Legrand Polska Legrand Elektrik San. A.S.
Tel. : (359) 2 489 92 97 Tel. : (98) 218 873 94 57/86 70 Tel. : (48) 748 162 300 Tel. : (90) 262 648 90 00
Fax : (359) 2 489 94 70 Fax : (98) 218 873 79 03 Fax : (48) 748 152 149 Fax : (90) 262 751 12 67
Canada Italy Portugal U.A.E.
Pass & Seymour Canada Inc Bticino S.p.a. Legrand Electrica S.A. Legrand SNC FZE
Tel. : (1) 905 738 91 95 Tel. : (39) 03 32 27 91 11 Tel. : (351) 21 454 88 00 Tel. : (971) 48 137 111
Fax : (1) 905 738 97 21 Fax : (39) 03 32 26 56 61 Fax : (351) 21 454 88 86 Fax : (971) 48 864 784
Chile Jordan Qatar Ukraine
Legrand Electro Andina Ltda (EAL) Legrand Legrand Legrand Ukraine Ltd
Tel. : (56) 2 550 52 00 Tel. : (962) 64 65 59 02 Tel. : (974) 456 90 83 Tel. : (38) 044 494 00 10
Fax : (56) 2 550 53 09 Fax : (962) 64 65 59 03 Fax : (974) 465 99 16 Fax : (38) 044 490 67 56
China Kazakhstan Reunion United States
Legrand China Legrand Kazakhstan Legrand Indian Ocean Legrand North America
Tel. : (86) 21 52 11 01 11 Tel. : (7) 32 72 26 03 63 Tel. : 02 62 90 01 80 Tel. : (1) 860 233 6251
Fax : (86) 21 52 11 00 86 Fax : (7) 32 72 26 03 63 Fax : 02 62 90 01 89 Fax : (1) 860 570 2813
Colombia Korea Romania Venezuela
Legrand Colombia S.A. Anam Legrand Co. Ltd Legrand Romania SRL Bticino De Venezuela C.A.
Tel. : (57) 1 437 67 00 Tel. : (82) 25 50 32 00 Tel. : (40) 21 232 07 77 Tel. : (58) 212 361 33 33
Fax : (57) 1 436 26 54 Fax : (82) 25 50 32 99 Fax : (40) 21 232 07 76 Fax : (58) 212 362 25 25
Costa Rica Kuwait Russia Vietnam
Bticino Costa Rica Legrand Firelec Legrand P.T. Legrand Vietnam
Tel. : (506) 22 98 56 00 Tel. : (965) 22 25 18 20 Tel. : (7) 495 660 75 50/60 Tel. : (848) 9 307 448
Fax : (506) 22 39 04 72 Fax : (965) 22 25 18 19 Fax : (7) 495 660 75 51/61 Fax : (848) 9 307 449
Croatia Lebanon Saudi Arabia West Indies
Legrand Legrand Legrand Legrand
Tel. : (385) 1 606 43 50 Tel. : (961) 1 422 166 Tel. : (966) 2 651 28 48 Tel. : (0) 5 90 86 18 53
Fax : (385) 1 606 43 59 Fax : (961) 1 422 167 Fax : (966) 2 651 74 34 Fax : (0) 5 90 86 23 05
Cyprus Lithuania Senegal Other countries :
Legrand Legrand Legrand www.legrand.com
Tel. : (357) 22 318 588 Tel. : (370) 523 56 500 Tel. : (221) 33 865 00 01 International department direct :
Fax : (357) 22 318 588 Fax : (370) 523 56 700 Fax : (221) 33 820 63 69 Tel. : 33 5 55 06 87 87
Czech Republic Malaysia Serbia and Montenegro Fax : 33 5 55 06 74 55
Legrand s.r.o. Legrand Legrand
Tel. : (420) 2 46 00 76 68 Tel. : (603) 62 04 06 88 Tel. : (381) 11 26 05 308
Fax : (420) 2 46 00 76 69 Fax : (603) 62 04 07 88 Fax : (381) 11 26 05 267
Egypt Mauritius Singapore
EMB Electrical Industries SAE Legrand Legrand (S) Pte Ltd
Tel. : (202) 23 78 61 50 Tel. : (230) 249 14 00 Tel. : (65) 6416 1550
Fax : (202) 23 80 70 32 Fax : (230) 249 15 00 Fax : (65) 6416 1580
Estonia Mexico Slovakia
Legrand SNC Bticino Mexico S.A. of C.V. Legrand
Tel. : (372) 67 99 110 Tel. : (52) 442 238 04 00 Tel. : (421) 232 153 601
Fax : (372) 67 99 113 Fax : (52) 442 238 04 82 Fax : (421) 232 153 609
Contact details
United Kingdom
Great King Street North,
Birmingham, B19 2LF
Customer Sevices:
Tel: +44 (0) 845 605 4333 Fax: +44 (0) 845 605 4334
E-mail: legrand.sales@legrand.co.uk
Technical Support:
Tel: +44 (0) 870 608 9020 Fax: +44 (0) 870 608 9021
E-mail: technical.uk@legrand.co.uk
Republic of Ireland:
Tel: 01 295 9673 Fax: 01 295 4671
E-mail: legrand.sales@legrand.co.uk
Distributor:
Cable tray technical guide 04/2012.10K
Head office (UK and Ireland):

Legrand Electric Limited
Great King Street North, Birmingham, B19 2LF
Tel: +44 (0) 870 608 9000 Fax: +44 (0) 870 608 9004
Website: www.legrand.co.uk
The Legrand logo is a registered trademark

This document is printed on sustainably sourced paper. Please recycle. of the Legrand group of companies.

Swifts Cable Tray

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Swifts Cable Tray

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Swifts Cable Tray

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Swifts®

PRODUCT TECHNICAL GUIDE /

the quick fit choice

Flange assembly Internal riser Flat bend

Side dropout Offset fourway Handed reducer

Create specialist Fold or bend 2 pairs Create left, right or

All of Legrand’s UK manufacturing sites are accredited to ISO 14001 : 2004

Support from design to installation

Cable management project examples

Shell EA and KC upgrades - Nigeria Heathrow T2/T3/T4/T5 - UK Arcapita Bank - Bahrain

No separate No universal No adjustable

50 SSL 50 F – – SSB 50 F – SSIR 50 F SSOR 50 F SSAR 50 F

75 SSL 75 F – – SSB 75 F – SSIR 75 F SSOR 75 F SSAR 75 F

MRF MEDIUM DUTY

50 MRFL 50 F MRFC50 F MRFUB F MRFB 50 F MRFAB 50 F MRFIR 50 F MRFOR 50 F MRFAR 50 F

75 MRFL 75 F MRFC F MRFUB F MRFB 75 F MRFAB 75 F MRFIR 75 F MRFOR 75 F MRFAR 75 F

SST 75 F – SSX 75 F SSR 75 K F

SST 100 F – SSX 100 F SSR 100 K F

SST 150 F – SSX 150 F SSR 150 K F

SST 225 F – SSX 225 F SSR 225 K F

FITTINGS Key : selecting MRF medium duty fittings

MRFT 75 F MRFUT 75 B F MRFX 75 F MRFR 75 K F W

MRFT 100 F MRFUT 100 B F MRFX 100 F MRFR 100 K F

MRFT 150 F MRFUT 150 B F MRFX 150 F MRFR 150 K F

MRFT225 F MRFUT 225 B F MRFX 225 F MRFR 225 K F

MRFT 300 F MRFUT 300 B F MRFX 300 F MRFR 300 K F

MRFT 450 F MRFUT 450 B F MRFX 450 F MRFR 450 K F

MRFT 600 F MRFUT 600 B F MRFX 600 F MRFR 600 K F

MRFT 750 F MRFUT 750 B F MRFX 750 F MRFR 750 K F

MRFT 900 F MRFUT 900 B F MRFX 900 F MRFR 900 K F

SRF HEAVY DUTY

75 SRFL 75 F SRFC F SRFUB F SRFB 75 F SRFAB 75 F SRFIR 75 F SRFOR 75 F SRFAR 75 F

XRF EXTRA HEAVY DUTY

No universal No adjustable No adjustable

available on XRF available on XRF available on XRF

SRFT 100 F SRFUT 100 B F SRFX 100 F SRFR 100 K F W

SRFT 150 F SRFUT 150 B F SRFX 150 F SRFR 150 K F

SRFT 225 F SRFUT 225 B F SRFX 225 F SRFR 225 K F

SRFT 300 F SRFUT 300 B F SRFX 300 F SRFR 300K F

SRFT 450 F SRFUT 450 B F SRFX 450 F SRFR 450 K F

SRFT 600 F SRFUT 600 B F SRFX 600 F SRFR 600 K F

SRFT 750 F SRFUT 750 B F SRFX 750 F SRFR 750 K F

SRFT 900 F SRFUT 900 B F SRFX 900 F SRFR 900 K F

FITTINGS Key : selecting XRF extra heavy duty fittings

XRFT 150 F XRFUT 150 B F XRFX 150 F XRFR 150 K F

XRFT 225 F XRFUT 225 B F XRFX 225 F XRFR 225 K F

XRFT 300 F XRFUT 300 B F XRFX 300 F XRFR 300 K F

XRFT 450 F XRFUT 450 B F XRFX 450 F XRFR 450 K F

90° inside riser

Selection chart (p. 12-13)

1 SSB W A F 60°, 45° and 30° bends

90° inside riser

Selection chart (p. 12-13)

1 SST W F Equal tees

1 SSX W F 4 way crosspieces

1 SSR W K F Straight reducers

Straight length Straight length

Selection chart (p. 12-13)

Additional gauges and finishes available

Straight length Straight length